InteliMains 210 BTB 2 0 0 Global Guide

InteliMains
210 BTB
Bus Tie Breaker controller
SW version 2.0.0
1 Document information 6
2 System overview 11
3 Applications overview 20
4 Installation and wiring 21
5 Controller setup 42
6 Communication 132
7 Technical data 161
8 Appendix 162
Copyright © 2018 ComAp a.s.

Written by Michal Slavata
Prague, Czech Republic
ComAp a.s., U Uranie 1612/14a,
170 00 Prague 7, Czech Republic
Tel: +420 246 012 111
E-mail: [email protected], www.comap-control.com Global Guide
Table of contents
1 Document information 6
1.1 Clarification of notation 6
1.2 About this Global Guide 6
1.3 Legal notice 6
1.4 General warnings 8
1.4.1 Remote control and programing 8
1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility 8
1.4.3 Dangerous voltage 8
1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints 8
1.5 Certifications and standards 9
1.6 Document history 9
1.7 Symbols in this manual 10
2 System overview 11
2.1 General description 11
2.1.1 The key features of InteliMains 210 11
2.2 True RMS measurement 11
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 12
2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools 12
2.3.2 Configuration parts 12
2.4 PC tools 14
2.4.1 InteliConfig 14
2.4.2 WebSupervisor 14
2.4.3 WinScope 15
2.5 Plug-in modules 15
2.5.1 CM-Ethernet 15
2.5.2 CM-4G-GPS 16
2.5.3 CM-GPRS 16
2.5.4 CM-RS232-485 16
2.5.5 EM-BIO8-EFCP 17
2.6 CAN modules 17
2.6.1 Inteli AIN8 17
2.6.2 Inteli IO8/8 18
2.6.3 IGS-PTM 18
2.6.4 IGL-RA15 19
3 Applications overview 20
InteliMains 210 Global Guide 2

3.1 BTB 20
4 Installation and wiring 21

4.1 Package content 21
4.2 Controller installation 22
4.2.1 Dimensions 22
4.2.2 Mounting 22
4.3 Terminal Diagram 24
4.4 Recommended wiring 25
4.4.1 General 26
4.4.2 Grounding 26
4.4.3 Power supply 26
4.4.4 Measurement wiring 28
4.4.5 Binary inputs 33
4.4.6 Binary Outputs 34
4.4.7 CAN bus and RS485 wiring 34
4.4.8 USB 39
4.4.9 USB HOST 39
4.5 Plug-in module installation 39
4.5.1 Installation 39
4.6 Maintenance 41
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement 41
5 Controller setup 42
5.1 Default configuration 42
5.1.1 Default configuration 42
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools connection 42
5.2.1 USB 43
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 44
5.2.3 Ethernet 45
5.2.4 Firmware upgrade 49
5.3 Operator Guide 52
5.3.1 Front panel elements 52
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 54
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 64
5.3.4 Password 65
5.3.5 Information screen 71
5.3.6 Language selection 72
5.3.7 Display contrast adjustment 74
5.4 Functions 74

5.4.1 Operating Modes 75
5.4.2 Connecting to load 75
5.4.3 Power management 78
5.4.4 Control groups 95
5.4.5 Distributed power management signals 96
5.4.6 Regulation loops 100
5.4.7 Frequency control 101
5.4.8 Voltage PF control 102
5.4.9 Electric state machine 102
5.4.10 Alarm management 103
5.4.11 History log 107
5.4.12 Breaker control 108
5.4.13 Exercise timers 111
5.4.14 Analog switches 117
5.4.15 Voltage phase sequence detection 119
5.4.16 Sensor curves 119
5.4.17 PLC 120
5.4.18 Alternate configuration 127
5.4.19 USB host 128
6 Communication 132
6.1 PC 132
6.1.1 Direct communication 132
6.1.2 Remote communication 134
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 145
6.2.1 SNMP 145
6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 147
7 Technical data 161
8 Appendix 162
8.1 Controller objects 163
8.1.1 Setpoints 164
8.1.2 Values 364
8.1.3 Logical binary inputs 399
8.1.4 Logical binary outputs 434
8.1.5 Logical analog inputs 462
8.1.6 PLC 491
8.2 Alarms 504
8.2.1 Alarms level 1 504

8.2.3 Fail sensor and other types 531
8.3 Modules 538
8.3.1 Plug-In modules 538
8.3.2 CAN modules 553

1 Document information
1.1 Clarification of notation 6
1.2 About this Global Guide 6
1.3 Legal notice 6
1.4 General warnings 8
1.5 Certifications and standards 9
1.6 Document history 9
1.7 Symbols in this manual 10
6 back to Table of contents
1.1 Clarification of notation

Note: This type of paragraph calls readers attention to a notice or related theme.
IMPORTANT: This type of paragraph highlights a procedure, adjustment etc., which can cause a
damage or improper function of the equipment if not performed correctly and may not be clear at
first sight.
Example: This type of paragraph contains information that is used to illustrate how a specific function
works.
1.2 About this Global Guide

This manual contains important instructions for InteliMains 210 controllers family that shall be followed during
installation and maintenance of the controllers.
This manual provides general information how to install and operate InteliMains 210 controllers.
This manual is dedicated for:
Operators
Control panel builders
For everybody who is concerned with installation, operation and maintenance
1.3 Legal notice

This End User's Guide/Manual as part of the Documentation is an inseparable part of ComAp’s Product and
may be used exclusively according to the conditions defined in the “END USER or Distributor LICENSE
AGREEMENT CONDITIONS – COMAP CONTROL SYSTEMS SOFTWARE” (License Agreement) and/or in
the “ComAp a.s. Global terms and conditions for sale of Products and provision of Services” (Terms) and/or in
the “Standardní podmínky projektů komplexního řešení ke smlouvě o dílo, Standard Conditions for Supply of
Complete Solutions” (Conditions) as applicable.
ComAp’s License Agreement is governed by the Czech Civil Code 89/2012 Col., by the Authorship Act
121/2000 Col., by international treaties and by other relevant legal documents regulating protection of the
intellectual properties (TRIPS).

The End User and/or ComAp’s Distributor shall only be permitted to use this End User's Guide/Manual with
ComAp Control System Registered Products. The Documentation is not intended and applicable for any other
purpose.
Official version of the ComAp’s End User's Guide/Manual is the version published in English. ComAp reserves
the right to update this End User's Guide/Manual at any time. ComAp does not assume any responsibility for its
use outside of the scope of the Terms or the Conditions and the License Agreement.
Licensed End User is entitled to make only necessary number of copies of the End User's Guide/Manual. Any
translation of this End User's Guide/Manual without the prior written consent of ComAp is expressly prohibited!
Even if the prior written consent from ComAp is acquired, ComAp does not take any responsibility for the
content, trustworthiness and quality of any such translation. ComAp will deem a translation equal to this End
User's Guide/Manual only if it agrees to verify such translation. The terms and conditions of such verification
must be agreed in the written form and in advance.
For more details relating to the Ownership, Extent of Permitted Reproductions Term of Use of the
Documentation and to the Confidentiality rules please review and comply with the ComAp’s License
Agreement, Terms and Conditions available on www.comap-control.com.
Security Risk Disclaimer
Pay attention to the following recommendations and measures to increase the level of security of ComAp
products and services.
Please note that possible cyber-attacks cannot be fully avoided by the below mentioned recommendations and
set of measures already performed by ComAp, but by following them the cyber-attacks can be considerably
reduced and thereby to reduce the risk of damage. ComAp does not take any responsibility for the actions of
persons responsible for cyber-attacks, nor for any damage caused by the cyber-attack. However, ComAp is
prepared to provide technical support to resolve problems arising from such actions, including but not limited to
restoring settings prior to the cyber-attacks, backing up data, recommending other preventive measures against
any further attacks.
Warning: Some forms of technical support may be provided against payment. There is no legal or factual
entitlement for technical services provided in connection to resolving problems arising from cyber-attack or
other unauthorized accesses to ComAp's Products or Services.
General security recommendations and set of measures
1. AccessCode
• Change the AccessCode BEFORE the device is connected to a network.
• Use a secure AccessCode – ideally a random string of 8 characters containing lowercase, uppercase letters
and digits.
• For each device use a different AccessCode.
2. Password
• Change the password BEFORE the device enters a regular operation.
• Do not leave displays or PC tools unattended if an user, especially administrator, is logged in.
3. Controller Web interface
• The controller web interface at port TCP/80 is based on http, not https, and thus it is intended to be used only
in closed private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port TCP/80 to the public Internet.
4. MODBUS/TCP
• The MODBUS/TCP protocol (port TCP/502) is an instrumentation protocol designed to exchange data
between locally connected devices like sensors, I/O modules, controllers etc. From it’s nature it does not

contain any kind of security – neither encryption nor authentication. Thus it is intended to be used only in closed
private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port TCP/502 to the public Internet.
5. SNMP
• The SNMP protocol (port UDP/161) version 1,2 is not encrypted. Thus it is intended to be used only in closed
private network infrastructures.
• Avoid exposing the port UDP/161 to the public Internet.
Used Open Source Software: mBed-TLS
https://www.mbed.com/en/development/software/mbed-tls/
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
1.4 General warnings

1.4.1 Remote control and programing
Controller can be remotely controlled. In the event that maintenance of gen-set has to be done, or controller has
to be programmed, check the following points to ensure that the engine cannot be started or any other parts of
the system cannot be effected.
To be sure:
Disconnect remote control
Disconnect binary outputs
1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

Be aware to use proper combination of SW and HW versions.
1.4.3 Dangerous voltage

In no case touch the terminals for voltage and current measurement!
Always connect grounding terminals!
In any case do not disconnect controller CT terminals!
1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints

All parameters are adjusted to their typical values. However the setpoints has to be checked and adjusted to
their real values before the first starting of the gen-set.
IMPORTANT: Wrong adjustment of setpoints can destroy the gen-set.
Note: The controller contains a large number of configurable setpoints, because of this it is impossible to
describe all of its functions. Some functions can be changed or have different behavior in different SW versions.
Always check the Global guide and New feature list for SW version which is used in controller. This manual
only describes the product and is not guaranteed to be set for your application.
IMPORTANT: Be aware that the binary outputs can change state during and after software
reprogramming (before the controller is used again ensure that the proper configuration and
setpoint settings are set in the controller).

The following instructions are for qualified personnel only. To avoid personal injury do not perform any action not
specified in related guides for product.
1.5 Certifications and standards

EN 61000-6-2
EN 61000-6-4
EN 61010-1
EN 60068-2-1 (-20 °C/16 h for std, -40 °C/16 h for LT version)
EN 60068-2-2 (70 °C/16 h)
EN 60068-2-6 (2÷25 Hz / ±1,6 mm; 25÷100 Hz / 4,0 g)
EN 60068-2-27 (a=500 m/s2; T=6 ms)
EN 60068-2-30:2005 25/55°C, RH 95%, 48hours
EN 60529 (front panel IP65, back side IP20)
1.6 Document history

Revision number Related sw. version Date Author
2 2.0.0 21.12.2018 Lubomír Brož
1 1.0.0 12.7.2018 Lubomír Brož

1.7 Symbols in this manual
Connector - Resistor
3 x Phases Grounding
male adjustable
Active Resistive
current Contact GSM sensor
sensor RPTC
GSM RS 232
Contactor
AirGate modem male
Controller RS 232
IG-AVRi
Alternating simplified female
current
Module IG-AVRi
Starter
Analog simplified TRANS
modem
Switch -
Current
Jumper manually
measuring
Battery operated
Current
Load Transformer
Binary measuring
output
USB type B
Diode Mains male
Breaker
contact
Ethernet USB type B
Mains female
Breaker male
contact
Voltage
Ethernet Mobile
measuring
female provider
Breaker
Passive Wifi / WAN /
Fuel
current LAN
solenoid
Breaker sensor
6 back to Document
information
Fuse Pick - up
Breaker
Fuse switch Relay coil

Capacitor
Relay coil of
Generator slow-
Coil
operating
Generator
Connector - schematic Resistor
female

2 System overview
2.1 General description 11
2.2 True RMS measurement 11
2.3 Configurability and monitoring 12
2.4 PC tools 14
2.5 Plug-in modules 15
2.6 CAN modules 17
2.1 General description

InteliMains 210 controller is comprehensive mains supervision controller for multiple generating sets operating
in parallel to the Mains. A modular construction allows upgrades to different levels of complexity in order to
provide the best solution for various customer applications. Controllers are equipped with a powerful graphic
display showing icons, symbols and bar-graphs for intuitive operation, which sets, together with high
functionality, new standards in Mains controls.
The controller automatically connects and synchronizes two parts of bus bar and controls the bus tie circuit
breaker (BTB).
The controller provides easy-to-use operation and installation. Predefined configurations for typical applications
are available as well as user-defined configurations for special applications.
2.1.1 The key features of InteliMains 210

Easy-to-use operation and installation. The factory default configuration covers most applications
Various customizations are possible thanks to its configurability
Excellent remote communication capabilities
High reliability
2.2 True RMS measurement

This controller measures AC values based on True RMS principle. This principle corresponds exactly to the
physical definition of alternating voltage effective values. Under normal circumstances the mains voltage
should have a pure sinusoidal waveform. However some nonlinear elements connected to the mains produce
harmonic waveforms with frequencies of multiplies of the basic mains frequency and this may result in
deformation of the voltage waveforms. The True RMS measurement gives accurate readings of effective values
not only for pure sinusoidal waveforms, but also for deformed waveforms.
Note: The harmonic deformation causes that the Power Factor of a generator working parallel with the mains
cannot reach values in a certain range around the PF 1.00. The higher the deformation, the wider the power
factor dead range. If the requested power factor is adjusted inside the dead range, the controller cannot reach
the requested value because of this fact.

2.3 Configurability and monitoring
One of the key features of the controller is the system’s high level of adaptability to the needs of each individual
application and wide possibilities for monitoring. This can be achieved by configuring and using the powerful
PC/mobile tools.
2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools

InteliConfig - complete configuration and single gen-set monitoring
WebSupervisor - web-based system for monitoring and controlling
WebSupervisor mobile - supporting application for smart-phones
WinScope - special graphical monitoring software
Note: Use the InteliConfig PC software to read, view and modify configuration from the controller or disk and
write the new configuration to the controller or disk.
The firmware of controller contains a large number of binary inputs and outputs needed for all necessary
functions available. However, not all functions are required at the same time on the same gen-set and also the
controller hardware does not have so many input and output terminals. One of the main tasks of the
configuration is mapping of “logical” firmware inputs and outputs to the “physical” hardware inputs and outputs.
2.3.2 Configuration parts

Mapping of logical binary inputs (functions) or assigning alarms to physical binary input terminals
Mapping of logical binary outputs (functions) to physical binary output terminals
Assigning sensor characteristics (curves) and alarms to analog inputs
Selection of peripheral modules, which are connected to the controller, and doing the same (as mentioned
above) for them
Changing the language of the controller interface

Image 2.1 Principle of binary inputs and outputs configuration
The controller is shipped with a default configuration, which should be suitable for most standard applications.
This default configuration can be changed only by using a PC with the InteliConfig software. See InteliConfig
documentation for details.
Note: You need one of communication modules to connect the controller to a PC with InteliConfig. There is a
special easy removable service module for cases when no communication module is permanently attached.
Once the configuration is modified, it can be saved to a file for later usage with another controller or for backup
purposes. The file is called archive and has the file extension .ail3. An archive contains a full image of the
controller at the time of saving (if the controller is online for the PC) except the firmware. Besides configuration it
also contains current adjustment of all setpoints, all measured values, a copy of the history log and a copy of the
alarm list.
The archive can be simply used for cloning controllers, i.e. preparing controllers with identical configuration and
settings.

2.4 PC tools
2.4.1 InteliConfig
Configuration and monitoring tool for InteliGen controllers. See more in InteliConfig Reference Guide.
This tool provides the following functions:

Direct or internet communication with the
controller
Offline or online controller configuration
Controller firmware upgrade
Reading/writing/adjustment of setpoints
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
Exporting data into a XLS file
Controller language translation
2.4.2 WebSupervisor
Web-based system for monitoring and controlling of controllers. See more at the WebSupervisor webpage.

Site and fleet monitoring
Reading of measured values
Browsing of controller history records
On-line notification of alarms
Email notification
Also available as a smart-phone application
WebSupervisor available at: www.websupervisor.net

Demo account:
Login: comaptest
Password: ComAp123

2.4.3 WinScope
Special graphical controller monitoring software used mainly for commissioning and gen-set troubleshooting.
See more in the WinScope Reference guide.

Monitoring and archiving of ComAp controller’s
parameters and values
View of actual / historical trends in controller
On-line change of controllers’ parameters for
easy regulator setup
2.5 Plug-in modules

2.5.1 CM-Ethernet
Internet/Ethernet module including web server.
10/100 Mbit ethernet interface in RJ45 socket
Web interface for monitoring and adjustment of
the controller
Direct IP and/or AirGate connection for remote
access from InteliConfig
MODBUS/TCP and SNMP protocols for
integration of the controller into building
management systems or other remote
monitoring purposes
Sending of active emails
Simply connection via AirGate

2.5.2 CM-4G-GPS
GSM/4G Internet module and GPS locator
Wireless integrated solution
Quick and easy installation
Support of WebSupervisor
Instant alarm SMS notification
System control over SMS
Quad Band GPRS/EDGE modem,
850/900/1800/1900 MHz, FDD LTE: Band 1,
Band 2, Band 3, Band 4, Band 5, Band 7, Band
8, Band 20, all bands with diversity,
WCDMA/HSDPA/HSUPA/HSPA+: Band 1,
Band 2, Band 5, Band 8, all bands with diversity
GPRS multi-slot class 10
TCP/IP communication over GPRS
2.5.3 CM-GPRS
GSM/GPRS Internet module
Wireless integrated solution
Quick and easy installation
Support of WebSupervisor
Instant alarm SMS notification
System control over SMS
Quad Band GPRS/EDGE modem,
850/900/1800/1900 MHz
GPRS multi-slot class 10
TCP/IP communication over GPRS
2.5.4 CM-RS232-485
Communication module with two communication ports.
RS232 and RS485 interface
MODBUS
Serial connection to InteliConfig

2.5.5 EM-BIO8-EFCP
Hybrid current input and binary input/output extension module.
One additional AC current (CT) measuring for
Earth Fault Current protection (EFCP)
Wide range of measured current - one input for
1A and 1 input for 5A
Up to 8 additional configurable binary inputs or
outputs
2.6 CAN modules

2.6.1 Inteli AIN8
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 analog inputs.
Supported sensors:
Resistor 3-wire input
Common resistor: 0-250Ω, 0-2400Ω, 0-10kΩ
Temperature sensor: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100,
Ni1000
Current (active or passive sensors)
±20mA , 0-20mA, 4-20mA
Voltage
±1V, 0-2,4V, 0-5V, 0-10V
Lambda probes
Thermocouples are not supported (the
measuring loop was designed for lambda
probes, what caused non-support of
thermocouples)
Impulse/RPM sensor:
RPM measuring pulses with frequency 4Hz –
10kHz
Impulse
Possibility to measure pulses from
electrometer, flowmeter (measurement of
total consumption, average fuel
consumption)

2.6.2 Inteli IO8/8
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, and 2 analog
outputs, or 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs via switches inside the controller.
Configuration 8/8
8 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
8 Binary outputs (options: Low side switch (LSS)
or High side switch (HSS))
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10V),
current (0-20mA) and PWM (5V, adjustable
frequency 200Hz-2,4kHz))
Configuration 16/0
16 Binary inputs (options: pull up or pull down
logic)
0 Binary outputs
2 Analog outputs (options: voltage (0-10V),
current (0-20mA) and PWM (5V, adjustable
frequency 200Hz-2,4kHz))
2.6.3 IGS-PTM
The unit offers the user the flexibility to configure the unit to have 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, 4 analog
inputs and 1 analog outputs.
Configurable 8 binary and 4 analog inputs
Configurable 8 binary and 1 analog output
LEDs indicate the state of binary inputs/outputs
Measures values from Pt100 and Ni100 sensors
Analog inputs (resistance range 0-250 Ohms,
voltage range 0-100mV, current range 0-20mA -
selectable via jumper)
UL certified

2.6.4 IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator.
15 programmable LEDs with configurable colors
red-green-yellow
Lamp test function with status LED
Customizable labels
Local horn output
Maximal distance 200 m from the controller
Up to 4 units can be connected to the controller
UL certified
6 back to System overview

3 Applications overview
3.1 BTB 20
3.1 BTB
Image 3.1 BTB application overview
InteliMains 210 controller closes automatically BTB if

bus voltages are within the limits
there is voltage on one of the buses and closing to dead bus is enabled
binary input BTB disable is not closed
it is enabled by setting of setpoints
6 back to Applications overview

4 Installation and wiring
4.1 Package content 21
4.2 Controller installation 22
4.3 Terminal Diagram 24
4.4 Recommended wiring 25
4.5 Plug-in module installation 39
4.6 Maintenance 41
4.1 Package content

The package contains:
Controller
Mounting holders
Terminal blocks
Note: The package does not contain a communication or extension modules. The required modules should be
ordered separately.

4.2 Controller installation
4.2.1 Dimensions
① Plug-in module
Note: Dimension x depends on plug-in module
Note: Dimensions are in millimeters.
Note: Cutout is in millimeters.
4.2.2 Mounting
The controller is to be mounted onto the switchboard door. Requested cutout size is 187 x 132 mm. Use the
screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller into the door as described on pictures
below.Recommended torque for holders is 0.15 N·m.

Panel door mounting
Note: The final depth of the controller depends on the selected extension module - it can vary between 41 and
56 mm. Mind also a size of connector and cables (e.g. in case of RS232 connector add about another 60 mm for
standard RS232 connector and cable).
Note: Enclosure Type rating with mounting instruction - For use on a Flat surface of a type 1 enclosure.
Note: These devices shall be mounted in a pollution degree 2 environment enclosure having adequate strength
and thickness with acceptable spacings being provided.
Note: The accessibility of live parts through openings in the enclosure, reliable retention of guards or barriers for
prevention of risk of electric shock, etc., shall be considered in the end product evaluation.
Note: These devices should be used within their electrical ratings and in an ambient temperature not exceeding
70 °C, for 4 A (BOUT 1 & 2) output or 60 ºC for 5 A (BOUT 1 & 2) output.
Note: Voltage sensing circuits shall be connected to controlled Overvoltage Category III circuits only in the end
product installation.

4.3 Terminal Diagram
① CURRENT ② MAINS VOLTAGE ③ BUS VOLTAGE ④ BINARY
MEASUREMENT INPUTS
T29 COM T37 N T41 N T45 BIN1
T30 L1 T38 L1 T42 L1 T46 BIN2
T31 L2 T39 L2 T43 L2 T47 BIN3
T32 L3 T40 L3 T44 L3 T48 BIN4
T49 BIN5
T50 BIN6
T51 BIN7
T52 BIN8
⑤ CAN1 ⑦ BINARY OUTPUTS ⑧ POWER SUPPLY, D+ ⑩ USB

T26 L T07 BOUT1 T01 BATT - ⑪ USB HOST
T27 COM T08 BOUT2 T02 D+
T28 H T09 BOUT3 T03 BATT +
⑥ CAN2 T10 BOUT4 ⑨ RS485
T23 L T11 BOUT5 T56 B
T24 COM T12 BOUT6 T57 COM
T25 H T58 A

4.4 Recommended wiring
Current inputs 29 - 32 Current measurement wiring (page 28)
Mains voltage inputs 37 - 40 Voltage measurement wiring (page 30)
Bus voltage inputs 41 - 44 Voltage measurement wiring (page 30)
Binary inputs 45 - 52 Binary inputs (page 33)
CAN1 H, COM, L CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 34)
CAN2 H, COM, L CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 34)
Binary outputs 07 - 12 Binary Outputs (page 34)
Power supply "+" D "-" Power supply (page 26)
RS485 A, COM, B CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 34)
USB USB B USB (page 39)
USB HOST USB A USB HOST (page 39)

IMPORTANT: Firmware InteliMains 210 is possible to upload also in to the InteliGen 200 Hardware.
Be aware that the BO1 and BO2 on the InteliGen 200 are used only combination with E-Stop input
which are in InteliMains 210 not supported. Check always the terminal numbers.
4.4.1 General
To ensure proper function:
Use grounding terminals.
Wiring for binary inputs and analog inputs must not be run with power cables.
Analog and binary inputs should use shielded cables, especially when the length is more than 3 m.
Tightening torque, allowable wire size and type, for the Field-Wiring Terminals:
For Mains(Bus) Voltage, Generator Voltage and Current terminals
Specified tightening torque is 0,56 Nm (5,0 In-lbs)
Use only diameter 2,0 - 0,5 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 90°C minimum.
For other controller field wiring terminals
Specified tightening torque 0,79 nm (7,0 In-lb)
Use only diameter 2,0 - 0,5 mm (12 - 26 AWG) conductor,

rated for 75°C minimum.
Use copper conductors only.
4.4.2 Grounding
The shortest possible length of wire should be used for controller grounding. Use cable min 2.5 mm2.
The negative " - " battery terminal must be properly grounded.
Switchboard and engine must be grounded at common point. Use as short cable as possible to the grounding
point.
4.4.3 Power supply

Use power supply cable min. 1.5 mm2

Maximum continuous DC power supply voltage is 36 V DC. The controller’s power supply terminals are
protected against large pulse power disturbances. When there is a potential risk of the controller being subjected
to conditions outside its capabilities, an outside protection device should be used.
It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between generator current COM terminal and battery “ - ”
terminal is maximally ± 2 V. Therefore is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals together.
Note: The controller should be grounded properly in order to protect against lighting strikes. The maximum
allowable current through the controller’s negative terminal is 4 A (this is dependent on binary output load).
For the connections with 12 V DC power supply, the controller includes internal capacitors that allow the
controller to continue in operation during cranking if the batter voltage dip occurs. If the voltage dip goes during
cranking to 0 V and after 50 ms it recovers to 4 V, the controller continues operating. This cycle can repeat
several times. During this voltage dip the controller screen backlight can turn off.
Note: Recommended fusing is 4 A fuse.
Note: In case of the dip to 0 V the high-side binary outputs will be temporarily switched off and after recovering
to 4 V back on.
IMPORTANT: When the controller is power up only by USB and the USB is disconnected then the
actual statistics can be lost.
Note: Suitable conductor protection shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 240.
Note: Low voltage circuits (35 volts or less) shall be supplied from the engine starting battery or an isolated
secondary circuit.
Note: It is also possible to further support the controller by connecting the external capacitor and separating
diode. The capacitor size depends on required time. It shall be approximately thousands of μF. The capacitor
size should be 5 000 μF to withstand 150 ms voltage dip under following conditions: Voltage before dip is 12 V,
after 150 ms the voltage recovers to min. allowed voltage, i.e. 8 V.
Power supply fusing

A 4 A fuse should be connected in-line with the battery positive terminal to the controller and modules. These
items should never be connected directly to the starting battery. Fuse value and type depends on number of
connected devices and wire length. Recommended fuse (not fast) type - T4 A. Not fast due to internal
capacitors charging during power up.

Note: Recommended fusing is 4 A fuse.
IMPORTANT: 4 A fuse is calculated without BOUT consumption nor extension modules. Real value
of fuse depends on consumption of binary outputs and modules.
Example: Maximal consumption of binary outputs can be 22 A

2 x 10 A on high current outputs (for 10 seconds)
2 A on all others binary outputs
4.4.4 Measurement wiring

Use 1.5 mm2 cables for voltage connection and 2.5 mm2 for current transformers connection. Adjust Connection
type (page 176), Nominal Voltage Ph-N (page 177), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 177), Nominal Current (page
175), Bus VT Ratio (page 177) by appropriate setpoints in the Basic Settings group.
IMPORTANT: Risk of personal injury due to electric shock when manipulating voltage terminals
under voltage. Be sure the terminals are not under voltage before touching them.
Do not open the secondary circuit of current transformers when the primary circuit is closed. Open
the primary circuit first.
Current measurement wiring

The number of CT’s is automatically selected based on selected value of setpoint Connection type (page 176)
[3Ph4Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph].
Mains currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is bellow <1 % of CT range.
Use cables of 2.5 mm2
Use transformers to 5 A
Connect CT according to following drawings:

3 phase application:
Image 4.1 3 phase application
It is necessary to ensure that potential difference between current COM terminal and battery “-” terminal is
maximally ± 2 V. Therefore is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals together.
Split phase application:
Image 4.2 Split phase application
IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where is
normally connected the third phase.

Mono phase application:
Connect CT according to following drawings. Terminals phase 2 and phase 3 are opened.
Image 4.3 Mono phase application
Voltage measurement wiring

There are 4 voltage measurement Connection Type (setpoint Connection type (page 176) [3Ph4Wire / High Leg
D / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph]) options, every type matches to corresponding connection type.
Note: For fusing of voltage measurement input use T1A or T2A fuse.
The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on Connection type (page 176) setting:
3Ph 4W – Ph-Ph voltage, Ph-N voltage
3Ph 3W – Ph-Ph voltage
Split Ph – Ph-N voltage
Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage

ConnectionType: 3 Phase 4 Wires
Image 4.4 3 phase application with neutral
ConnectionType: 3 Phase 3 Wires
Image 4.5 3 phase application without neutral

ConnectionType: Split Phase
Image 4.6 Split phase application
IMPORTANT: The second phase of split phase connection is connected to the terminal, where is
normaly connected the third phase.
ConnectionType: Mono Phase
Image 4.7 Mono phase application
Voltage measurement InteliMains applications on InteliGen 200 hardware

Because there is possible to import the InteliMains 210 Firmware in to the InteliGen 200 Hardware, is important
to respect the number of terminals for voltage measurement.

Image 4.8 Voltage measurement on InteliGen 200 Hardware
4.4.5 Binary inputs

Use minimally 1 mm2 cables for wiring of Binary inputs.
Image 4.9 Wiring binary inputs
Note: The name and function or alarm type for each binary input have to be assigned during the configuration.

4.4.6 Binary Outputs
Use min. 1 mm2 cables for wiring of binary outputs. Use external relays as indicated on the schematic below for
all outputs except those where low-current loads are connected (signalization etc...).
IMPORTANT: Use suppression diodes on all relays and other inductive loads!
Note: Every single binary output can provide up to 0,5 A of steady current.
IMPORTANT: When operating temperature is higher than 60 °C it is strongly recommended to limit

output current of high current binary outputs (terminal 45 and terminal 56) to 4 A (each).
4.4.7 CAN bus and RS485 wiring

CAN bus wiring
The wiring of the CAN bus should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
The maximum length of the CAN bus depends on the communication speed. For a speed of 250 kbps, which
is used on the CAN1 bus (extension modules) and CAN2 bus, the maximum length is 200 m.
The bus must be wired in linear form with termination resistors at both ends. No nodes are allowed except on
the controller terminals.

Shielded cable1 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the CAN bus line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.
The CAN bus has to be terminated by 120 Ohm resistors at both ends use a cable with following
parameters:
Cable type Shielded twisted pair

Impedance 120 Ω
Propagation velocity ≥ 75% (delay ≤ 4,4 ns/m)
Wire crosscut ≥ 0,25 mm2
Attenuation (@1MHz) ≤ 2 dB/100 m
Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.
Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120 Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close the
jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.
Image 4.10 CAN bus topology
1Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

For shorter distances (connection within one building)
Image 4.11 CAN bus wiring for shorter distances
Note: Shielding shall be grounded at one end only. Shielding shall not be connected to CAN COM terminal.
For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)
Image 4.12 CAN bus wiring for longer distances
① Recommended PT5-HF-12DC-ST1
RS485 wiring
The wiring of the RS485 communication should be provided in such a way that the following rules are observed:
Note: A termination resistor at the CAN (120Ω) is already implemented on the PCB. For connecting, close the
jumper near the appropriate CAN terminal.
Standard maximum bus length is 1000 m.

Shielded cable2 has to be used, shielding has to be connected to the terminal T01 (Grounding).
External units can be connected on the RS485 line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no
star) is necessary.
The line has to be terminated by 120 Ohm resistors at both ends.
1Protections recommended: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-12DC-ST with PT2x2-
BE (base element) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-012/2 R DJ

2Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) - for shorter distances: 3105A Paired - EIA
Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1x2 conductors); for longer distances: 3106A Paired - EIA Industrial RS-485
PLTC/CM (1x2+1 conductors)

For shorter distances (connection within one building).
Image 4.13 RS485 wiring for shorter distances
For longer distances or in case of surge hazard (connection out of building, in case of storm etc.)
Image 4.14 RS485 wiring for longer distances
① Recommended PT5HF-5DC-ST1
Note: Communication circuits shall be connected to communication circuits of Listed equipment.
1Recommended protections: Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-5DC-ST with PT2x2-
BE (base element)(or MT-RS485-TTL) or Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-006/2 R DJ

On board RS485 description
Balancing resistors
The transmission bus into the RS-485 port enters an indeterminate state when it is not being transmitted to. This
indeterminate state can cause the receivers to receive invalid data bits from the noise picked up on the cable.
To prevent these data bits, you should force the transmission line into a known state. By installing two 620 Ohm
balancing resistors at one node on the transmission line, you can create a voltage divider that forces the voltage
between the differential pair to be less than 200 mili-Volts, the threshold for the receiver. You should install
these resistors on only one node. The figure below shows a transmission line using bias resistors. Balancíng
resistors are placed directly on the PCB of controller. Use jumpers PULL UP/PULL DOWN to connect the
balancing resistors.
Image 4.15 Balancing resistors
Image 4.16 RS485 on board

4.4.8 USB
This is required for computer connection. Use the shielded USB A-B cable.
Image 4.17 USB connection
Controller can by also power by USB (only for service purpose like a uploading firmware, change of
configuration etc.).
IMPORTANT: Power supply by USB is only for service purpose. Binary inputs and outputs are in
logical 0. Also plug-in modules are not working.
4.4.9 USB HOST

USB Flash Drive can be connected into USB A connector.
4.5 Plug-in module installation

4.5.1 Installation
Remove the back cover. To do this, press four holders which are located in corners.

After removing back cover insert the plug-in module. Plug-in module has to be inserted under holders. Start with
holders marked by symbol 1. On the controller are also arrows for better navigation. After inserting plug-in
module under holders 1 press it down to holders marked by symbol 2 which locks the module.
Insert the plug-in module under holders marked by symbol 1.
After locking the plug-in module into holders, place back the back cover (small cover for connectors has to be
removed from back cover). Finally insert the small cover for connectors. Small covers are unique for each plug-
in module.

4.6 Maintenance
4.6.1 Backup battery replacement
The internal backup battery lifetime is approx. 6 years. If replacement of backup batter is needed, follow these
instructions:
Connect the controller to a PC and save an archive for backup purposes (not necessary but recommended).
Disconnect all terminals from the controller and remove the controller from the switchboard.
Remove the back cover and all plug-in modules.
Release the rear cover using a flat screwdriver or another suitable tool.
The battery is located in a holder on the circuit board. Remove the old battery with a small sharp screwdriver
and push with a finger the new battery into the holder.
Put the rear cover back. Use slight pressure to lock the snaps into the housing. Pay attention that the cover
is in correct position and not upside down!
Put back the plugin modules and back cover.
Power the controller on, adjust date and time and check all setpoints.
6 back to Installation and wiring

5 Controller setup
5.1 Default configuration 42
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools connection 42
5.3 Operator Guide 52
5.4 Functions 74
5.1 Default configuration

5.1.1 Default configuration
Binary inputs
Number Description Configured function

BIN1 Bus tie breaker feedback BTB Feedback
BIN2 Access lock keyswitch Access lock
BIN3 Spare Not used
BIN4 Manual closing of BTB Force BTB Close
BIN5 Spare Not used
BIN6 Spare Not used
BIN7 Spare Not used
BIN8 Spare Not used
Binary outputs
Number Description Function

BOUT1 Control of BTB BTB Close/Open
BOUT2 Status of system reserve System Reserve OK
BOUT3 Spare Not used
5.2 Controller configuration and PC tools

connection
5.2.1 USB 43
5.2.2 RS232/RS485 44
5.2.3 Ethernet 45

5.2.4 Firmware upgrade 49
6 back to Controller setup

This chapter contains brief introduction into the specifics of firmware and archive upload and connection of
various PC tools to the controller. If you require detailed information on each PC tool please use the included
Help in those PC tools or download their Reference Guides.
5.2.1 USB
You may connect to the controller using the USB port. In this case standard USB A to B cable should be used.
Connection using InteliConfig
Image 5.1 First screen of InteliConfig - select connect to controller
Image 5.2 Second screen of InteliConfig - select detected controllers

Connection using WinScope
Image 5.3 WinScope screen - select direct connection
5.2.2 RS232/RS485
It is possible to connect to the controller using RS232 or RS485 direct connection (serial port or USB to
RS232/RS485 converter may be used). The following settings need to be checked in the controller:
COM1 Mode (page 263) = Direct
Controller Address (page 181) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool

Image 5.5 Second screen of InteliConfig - select Serial link
Image 5.6 WinScope screen - select direct connection
Note: Winscope supports only 19200, 38400, 57600 speeds.
5.2.3 Ethernet
It is possible to connect to the controller using ethernet port either directly or using ComAp's AirGate service.
Direct connection
When you use direct connection the controller needs to be reachable directly from the PC you use (i.e. one LAN
or WAN without any firewalls and other points that may not allow the connection). The following settings need to
be checked in the controller:

Controller Address (page 181) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool.
IP Address Mode (page 289) can be set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service is available. Otherwise
it needs to be set to FIXED.
IP Address (page 290) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value.
Subnet Mask (page 290) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested.
Gateway IP (page 290) can be set here when it is used.
ComAp TCP Port (page 294) number is 23. Make sure that this port is open for communication in your
network.

Image 5.8 Second screen of InteliConfig - select Internet/Ethernet
Image 5.9 WinScope screen
AirGate connection
You can use ComAp's AirGate service that allows you to connect to any controller via internet no matter what
are the restrictions of the local network (if the controller can connect to the internet AirGate service will work).
The following setpoints have to be adjusted:

Controller Address (page 181) has to be set to the same value as in the PC tool.
IP Address Mode (page 289) can be set to AUTOMATIC when there is DHCP service is available. Otherwise
it needs to be set to FIXED.
IP Address (page 290) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested value.
Subnet Mask (page 290) is either set automatically or it can be adjusted to a specific requested.
Gateway IP (page 290) can be set here when it is used.
AirGate Connection (page 293) has to be set to Enabled.
AirGate Address (page 293) currently there is one AirGate server running at URL airgate.comap.cz (enter this
URL into the setpoint).

Image 5.11 Second screen of InteliConfig - select AirGate

WinScope doesn't support connection via AirGate.
5.2.4 Firmware upgrade

Firmware upgrade is provided through InteliConfig pc software. For more information please download the
manual from websites.
https://www.comap-control.com/products/detail/inteliconfig
Firmware upgrade in IG200 hardware

IMPORTANT: InteliMains 210 firmware is possible to use also with InteliGen 200 hardware. But
because there are some important differences between both hardwares, please pay always attention
by configuration of InteliMains 210.
The main issue is based on Binary outputs on InteliGen 200.

Image 5.12 Terminal diagram InteliGen 200 and InteliMains 210
InteliMains 210 doesn't use the terminals 04, 05, 06 see Terminal Diagram on page 24. This leads to very
specific condition which has to be remembered during configuration.
From the configuration point of view is that you configure always binary outputs BO1-BO6 and on InteliGen 200
hardware is it in fact BO3-BO8.

Image 5.13 Binary outputs configuration IM210
Image 5.14 Binary outputs configuration IG200
IMPORTANT: During configuration of binary outputs either for InteliMains 210 or InteliGen 200
hardware is always required to keep the same terminal numbers BO1=07...BO6=12!

5.3 Operator Guide
5.3.1 Front panel elements 52
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure 54
5.3.3 Browsing alarms 64
5.3.4 Password 65
5.3.5 Information screen 71
5.3.6 Language selection 72
5.3.7 Display contrast adjustment 74
5.3.1 Front panel elements
Image 5.15 Operator interface of InteliMains 210
Control buttons
Position Picture Description
LEFT button. Use this button to move left or to change the mode. The button can
change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of currently selected
mode is displayed.
Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced by
one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – “Operating modes”
chapter.
RIGHT button. Use this button to move right or to change the mode. The button
can change the mode only if the main screen with the indicator of currently
selected mode is displayed.

Note: This button will not change the mode if the controller mode is forced by
one of binary inputs listed in the Reference Guide – “Operating modes”
chapter.
HORN RESET button. Use this button to deactivate the horn output without
acknowledging the alarms.
FAULT RESET button. Use this button to acknowledge alarms and deactivate
the horn output. Inactive alarms will disappear immediately and status of active
alarms will be changed to "confirmed" so they will disappear as soon as their
reasons dismiss.
UP button. Use this button to move up or increase value.
PAGE button. Use this button to switch over display pages.
DOWN button. Use this button to move down or decrease value.
ENTER button. Use this button to finish editing a setpoint or moving right in the
history page.
BTB button. Works in MAN mode only. Press this button to open or close the
BTB or start the synchronization manually.
Indicators and others

Position Description
Bus Right status indicator. There are two states - Bus Right OK (indicator is green) and Bus
Right failure (indicator is red). Green LED is on if the Bus Right voltage is present and within
limits. Red LED starts flashing when Bus Right failure occurs. After FAULT RESET button is
pressed, goes to steady light (if an alarm is still active) or is off (if no alarm is active).

BTB ON. Green LEDs are on if BTB is closed and Bus is healthy. If Bus is not healthy and BTB
is closed than middle LED is on. It is driven by BTB CLOSE/OPEN output or by BTB feedback
signal.
Bus Left status indicator. There are two states - Bus Left OK (indicator is green) and Bus Left
failure (indicator is red). Green LED is on if Bus Left is present and within limits. Red LED starts
blinking when the Bus Left failure occurs. After FAULT RESET button is pressed, goes to steady
light (if an alarm is still active) or is off (if no alarm is active).
Graphic B/W display, 132x64 pixels.
5.3.2 Display screens and pages structure

The displayed information is structured into "pages" and "screens". Use PAGE button to switch over the pages.
The page Measurement consists of screens which display measured values like voltages, current, oil
pressure etc., computed values like i.e. gen-set power, statistic data and the alarm list on the last screen.
The page Setpoints contains all setpoints organized to groups and also a special group for entering
password.
The page History log shows the history log in the order that the last record is displayed first.
Main Screen
Symbols
Padlock - active when LBI ACCESS LOCK is active
R - active when there is active remote connection to controller
Exclamation mark - active when there is any alarm in alarmlist
Measurement Screens
Note: Use Up and Down button to move between measurement pages.





Note: From all of these pages it is possible to switch seamlessly to the setpoint group page by pressing Page
button.
Note: There can be some additional screens and also some screens can be hidden. Screen’s visibility
depends on actual configuration (usage of extension or communication modules, etc.).
Setpoint Screens
Note: From all measurement pages we can fluently go to the setpoint group page by pressing Page button.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
setpoint group.
Note: Use Enter button to enter selected setpoint group.
Note: Use Left and Right button to select required setpoint.
Note: Use Enter button to enter selected setpoint.

Note: Use Up and
Down button to set
required value of
selected setpoint.
Note: Use Enter button to confirm adjusted value of setpoint.
Note: Use Page button to discard changes, to set setpoint to previous value and to return to the list of
setpoints of selected group.
IMPORTANT: Cannot change setpoint? Setpoints marked with an padlock are password protected.
Enter password as described in the chapter Password (page 65).
History Log
Note: From setpoint group page we can fluently go to the history log pages by pressing Page button.

Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Enter button to move to the next page of history log.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.

Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select required
alarm reason.
Note: Use Enter button to move to the first page of history log.
IMPORTANT: The records are numbered in reverse order, i.e. the latest (newest) record is "0" and
older records have "-1", "-2" etc.
Note: This is only basic history record. There can be some additional screens in case that in controller is
extension module is configured. Also it depends on connection type.
5.3.3 Browsing alarms
Note: Use Up button to move to alarmlist from main measurement screen.

Active alarms are displayed as white text on black background. It means the alarm is still active, i.e. the
appropriate alarm conditions are still present.
Inactive alarms are displayed as black text on white background. It means the alarm is no more active, i.e.
the appropriate alarm conditions are gone.
Not confirmed alarms are displayed with an asterisk. It means the alarm is still not acknowledged
(confirmed).
5.3.4 Password
Enter password

Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select setpoint
group Password.
Note: Use Enter button to enter setpoint group Password.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select Enter
Password.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to set
required value of
selected setpoint.
Note: Use Left and Right button to move between digits.
Note: Use Enter button to confirm the password or Page button to cancel entering the password.

Note: In case that invalid password is entered, the controller shows Invalid password screen. Use Page
button to go back to menu.
Change password
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select setpoint group
Password.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select Change
Password.

Note: Use Up and
Down button to
select required level
of password.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to set
required value of
password.
Note: After setting new password use Enter button to confirm adjusted password.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to set
required value of
password again.
Note: After setting new password again use Enter button to confirm adjusted password or Page button to
discard changes and to cancel changing password.

Note: Before changing the password controller has to be unlocked. In case that controller is locked, the
controller shows Password required screen. In that case the password has to be entered before changing the
password.
Log out from controller
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select setpoint
group Password.
Note: Use Up and

Down button to
select Enter
Password.

Note: Use Up and
Down button to set
required value of
selected setpoint.
Note: Enter invalid password to log out from controller.
Note: In case that invalid password is entered, the controller shows Invalid password screen. Use Page
button to go back to menu.
Lost Password
If you lost the administrator-level (level 3) password, proceed according to following steps.
1. Connect to the controller with InteliConfig, go to "Password reset" window and proceed according to the
instructions there. You will obtain unique one-time request code which must be sent to ComAp technical
support.
2. ComAp technical support will send an unique one-time action code to the backup e-mail address specified in
the controller.
3. Copy the received action code to InteliConfig and reset the administrator-level password to default.
IMPORTANT: It is extremely important to adjust the backup e-mail address in the controller.
Otherwise you will not be able to receive the action code!
IMPORTANT: If the backup email was not setup. Display the information screen containing the
serial number and password decode number as described in the chapter Information screen (page
71) and send them to your local distributor.
Password break protection

The controller password is protected against breaking by brute force. The protection works at every controller
interface separately.
1. When an invalid password is entered 5 times after each other, independently on the time period elapsed
between the attempts, the controller will be blocked after the 5th unsuccessful attempt for 1 minute at the

particular interface.
2. While the controller is blocked it refuses any further attempts to enter password.
3. When unblocked again the controller accepts one attempt to enter password. If the password is incorrect
again the controller will be blocked for 2 minutes.
4. Each further attempt to enter invalid password will double the blocking time, but maximum blocking time is
20 minutes.
5. When incorrect password is entered 100-times after each other the controller is blocked forever and the
password reset procedure is required to unblock it.
5.3.5 Information screen
+
Note: On Main measurement screen press Enter and Page button together. Enter button has to be pressed
first.
Note: Use Page button to move to the next page.

Note: Use Up button to move back to main measurement screen.
5.3.6 Language selection
+
Note: On Main measurement screen press Enter and Page button together. Enter button has to be pressed
first.

Note: Use Up and

down button to
select required
language.
Note: Use Enter button to confirm selected language.

5.3.7 Display contrast adjustment
+ +
Note: On any measurement screen press Enter and Note: On any measurement screen press Enter and
Down button together for lower contrast. Up button together for higher contrast.
Note: After setting a contrast, no another action is needed.
5.4 Functions
5.4.1 Operating Modes 75
5.4.2 Connecting to load 75
5.4.3 Power management 78
5.4.4 Control groups 95
5.4.5 Distributed power management signals 96
5.4.6 Regulation loops 100
5.4.7 Frequency control 101
5.4.8 Voltage PF control 102
5.4.9 Electric state machine 102
5.4.10 Alarm management 103
5.4.11 History log 107
5.4.12 Breaker control 108
5.4.13 Exercise timers 111
5.4.14 Analog switches 117
5.4.15 Voltage phase sequence detection 119
5.4.16 Sensor curves 119
5.4.17 PLC 120

5.4.18 Alternate configuration 127
5.4.19 USB host 128
5.4.1 Operating Modes

Selecting the operating mode is done through Left and Right buttons on the front panel or by changing the
Controller mode (page 178) setpoint (from the front panel or remotely).
Note: If this setpoint is configured as password-protected, the correct password must be entered prior to
attempting to change the mode.
Note: The mode cannot be changed if Access Lock input is active.
The following binary inputs can be used to force one respective operating mode independent of the mode
setpoint selection:
Remote OFF (page 432)
Remote MAN (page 432)
Remote AUTO (page 431)
If the respective input is active the controller will change the mode to the respective position according to the
active input. If multiple inputs are active, the mode will be changed according to priorities of the inputs. The
priorities match the order in the list above. If all inputs are deactivated, the mode will return to the original
position given by the setpoint.
OFF
All regulations are switched off. Switching to OFF mode causes opening of BTB regardless of the settings.
MAN
It is possible to close/open BTB manually under supervision of InteliMains controller (automatic synchronization
is started if there are voltages on both sides).
AUTO
Controller closes automatically BTB if:
bus voltages are within the limits
there is voltage on both, one or none of the buses and closing to dead bus is enabled
5.4.2 Connecting to load

Connecting to dead bus
BTB
Behavior of connecting to dead bus is adjusted by setpoint Dead Bus Closing (page 174).
Note: There is also a protection of "Bus power loss sensing". The "Bus Measurement Error" is detected when
the BTB is closed and the bus parameters are out of limit for 20s. Bus Measurement Error can be disabled by
setpoint.

Synchronization
Synchronization process
It is possible to influence the behavior of the controller in MAN and AUTO mode and limit the process of
synchronization. Following setpoints have influence to synchronization process:
Mains Coupling (page 171)
Synchronization R To Mains (page 172)
Synchronization L To Mains (page 173)
Synchronization R To L (page 173)
Synchronization L To R (page 173)
Dead Bus Closing (page 174)
BTB Opening (page 174)
Note: When the controller starts to synchronize and the main measuring screen is displayed, it will be
automatically change to the synchroscope screen for the entire duration of synchronization. After
synchronization the synchroscope screen is automatically changed back to the main measuring screen. It is
also possible to change screens manually (arrows up and down) after displaying the synchroscope screen. In
this case there is no automatic return to the main measuring screen after synchronization is finished.
Synchronization via BTB in AUTO mode

BTB controller controls the synchronization process. Behavior of synchronization depends on power sources of
bus left and bus right.
Dead bus Gen-sets Mains Gen-sets + Mains

BTB Opening Dead Bus Closing (page Dead Bus Closing (page Dead Bus Closing (page
Dead bus
(page 174) 174) 174) 174)
Synchronization R To L Synchronization L To R Synchronization L To R
Dead Bus Closing (page 173) (page 173) (page 173)
Gen-sets
(page 174) Synchronization L To R Synchronization L To Synchronization L To
(page 173) Mains (page 173) Mains (page 173)
Synchronization R To L
Dead Bus Closing (page 173) Mains Coupling (page Mains Coupling (page
Mains
(page 174) Synchronization R To 171) 171)
Mains (page 172)
Gen-sets Dead Bus Closing (page 173) Mains Coupling (page Mains Coupling (page
+ Mains (page 174) Synchronization R To 171) 171)
Mains (page 172)
Note: Power sources in left column are on left side and power sources in top row are on right side.
Synchronization without Mains

In situation when on both sides are only gen-sets, setpoint Synchronization R To L (page 173) or Synchronization L
To R (page 173) has to be enabled.

Synchronization with Mains on one side
In situation when one one side are only gen-sets and on second side is Mains or Gen-sets wirh Mains, setpoint
Synchronization R To L (page 173) or Synchronization L To R (page 173) or Synchronization R To Mains (page 172)
or Synchronization L To Mains (page 173) has to be enabled.
Synchronization with Mains on both sides

In situation when on both sides is Mains or Mains with Gen-sets, setpoint Mains Coupling (page 171) has to be
enabled.
Synchronization via BTB in MAN mode

BTB controller controls the synchronization process.
Behavior is exactly the same as in AUTO mode - but the synchronization does not start again automatically
when parameters of the Bus gets out of limits and back. The breaker control button must be pressed again.
When the BTB button is pressed during the synchronization, then the synchronization process is
interrupted.
Synchronization types
There are two types of synchronization. Type of synchronization is adjusted via setpoint Synchronization Type
(page 204).
Phase match
The phase match synchronization consists of voltage matching and frequency/angle matching. The maximum
duration of synchronization is given by the setpoint Synchronization Timeout (page 204). If the synchronization is
not successful within this period of time, the Synchronization Fail (page 512) alarm will be issued.
Voltage matching
The bus voltage is regulated to match the mains voltage with tolerance given by the setpoint Voltage Window
(page 205). The regulation is adjusted by the setpoints Voltage Gain (page 203) and Voltage Int (page 203).
Frequency/angle matching
The bus frequency is regulated to match the mains frequency first. The frequency regulation loop is active
(setpoints Frequency Gain (page 202) and Frequency Int (page 202)). Once the frequency is matched, the
regulation loop is switched to match the angle (setpoint Angle Gain (page 203)). When the angle is matched with
tolerance +/- Phase Window (page 205) for a time given by the setpoint Dwell Time (page 205) and the voltage is
matched too, then the BTB is closed.
Note: The matching loops will continue to run even if the BTB close command has been already issued until the
controller receives BTB FEEDBACK (PAGE 427) or a BTB fail alarm occurs. After the feedback has been
received, the control loops are switched to load and power factor loops or load and power factor sharing
respectively.
Slip synchronization
The slip synchronization is based on frequency/angle matching. The maximum duration of synchronization is
given by the setpoint Synchronization Timeout (page 204). If the synchronization is not successful within this
period of time, the Synchronization Fail (page 512) alarm will be issued.
Frequency/angle matching

The bus frequency is regulated to match the mains frequency + Slip Frequency (page 205). The frequency
regulation loop is active (setpoints Frequency Gain (page 202) and Frequency Int (page 202)). Once the frequency
is matched, the regulation loop gets frozen immediately and the command for breaker closing is unblocked after
the delay given by setpoint Dwell Time (page 205). However the closing breaker command is issued later in
advance before the expected phase match. The proper "angle of advance" is calculated from setpoints MGCB
Latency (page 206) or MCB Latency (page 206).
Whenever the bus frequency leaves off the Slip Frequency Window (page 206), the command for breaker closing
gets blocked and regulation of frequency is activated again. The same procedure starts again.
5.4.3 Power management

The Power management function decides how many gen-sets should run and selects particular gen-sets to run.
The power management is applicable in cases multiple gen-sets run in parallel to mains or in the island
operation. The function is based on the load evaluation in order to provide enough of available running power.
Since it allows the system to start and stop gen-sets based on the load demand, it can vastly improve the
system fuel efficiency. In other words, an additional gen-set starts when the load of the system raises above
certain level. The additional gen-set stops, when the load of the system drops down below a certain level. The
process of determining gen-set start and stop is done in each controller; there is no "master slave" system.
Therefore, the system is very robust and resistant to failures of any unit in the system. Each of the controllers
can be switched off without influencing the whole system. Except the situation the respective gen-set is not
available for the power management.
The power management evaluates so called load reserve. The load reserve is calculated as difference between
actual load and nominal power of running gen-sets. The reserve is calculated as absolute value (in kW / kVA) or
relatively to the nominal power of gen-set(s) (in %). The setpoint #Power Management Mode (page 192) is used
to select the absolute or relative mode.
The automatic priority swapping function focuses on efficient run of gen-set in regards to running hours and gen-
set size.
IMPORTANT: The function of the controller is designed to handle the maximum sum of nominal
power at 32000 kW (or 3200,0 with decimal number).
Example: There are 20 gen-sets each with 1000 kW of nominal power. The sum of the nominal power is
20000 kW. Therefore the decimal power format in 0.1 kW cannot be used because the sum exceeds 32000.
Therefore power format in kW needs to be chosen.
Basic power management

The Logical binary inputs REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 433) requests the system to start or stop. If the input is
not active, the system stops with delay #System Stop Delay (page 193) after the input has been deactivated and
will not start again if in AUTO mode. If the input is activated again, the delay #System Start Delay (page 193)
starts to count down. Once the delay elapsed, the system is activated and can be started by the power
management. In other words, the power management is activated only if the Logical binary inputs REMOTE
START /STOP (PAGE 433) is activated.
Note: The gen-set performs load and VAR sharing whenever it is connected to the bus bar i.e. it is independent
on whether the controller is in AUTO or MAN mode or whether the power management is active or not.
Principle of power management

Internal conditions based on remaining load reserves and priorities are evaluated once a delay is elapsed. If the
load reserve is insufficient the gen-set is started after delay given by the setpoint #Next Engine Start Delay (page

198) is elapsed. Once the gen-set runs the controller evaluates stopping conditions based on load reserves and
priorities. If the reserve is sufficient enough to stop a particular gen-set, it is stopped after delay given by the
setpoint #Next Engine Stop Delay (page 198) is elapsed. All the time the system stop condition – i.e. the Logical
binary inputs REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE 433) deactivated – is evaluated as well. Once the delay given by the
setpoint #System Stop Delay (page 193) has elapsed all gen-sets in AUTO mode are stopped. Following figure
depicts the system activation and deactivation logic.
Setpoint #Overload Next Start Delay (page 199) is used in case that #Overload Next Start Protection (page 199)
is enabled and gen-sets are running at #Overload Next Start Level (page 199) or more of their nominal power.
Load reserve
The power management is based on the load reserve concept. The load reserve is defined as a difference of the
running nominal power of the group within power management and the total load of the system. There are two
ways how to determine the load reserve. The absolute power management allows the system to keep the load
reserve higher or equal to value in kW given by a relevant setpoint. The relative power management assures
that load reserve is kept higher or equal to relative portion in % of the nominal power of group (i.e. running gen-
sets active in power management) given by a relevant set-point. Depending of the situation, load reserves are
calculated differently in two cases:

Case #1
This case is used in island operation.
Reserve Actual Reserve Start condition Stop condition

ARstrt = ∑PgNom - ∑PgAct ARstrt < ARstp >
Absolute kW
ARstp = ∑Pg*Nom - ∑PgAct #LoadResStrt #LoadResStop
RRstrt = [(∑PgNom - ∑PgAct) / ∑PgNom].100% RRstrt < RRstp >
Relative %
RRstp = [(∑Pg*Nom - ∑PgAct) / ∑Pg*Nom].100% #%LdResStrt #%LdResStop
Case #2
This case is used in parallel to mains operation.
Reserve Actual Reserve Start condition Stop condition

ARstrt = ∑PgNom - BaseLoad ARstrt < ARstp >
Absolute kW
ARstp = ∑Pg*Nom - BaseLoad #LoadResStrt #LoadResStop
RRstrt = [(∑PgNom - BaseLoad) / ∑PgNom].100% RRstrt < RRstp >
Relative %
RRstp = [(∑Pg*Nom - BaseLoad) / ∑Pg*Nom].100% #%LdResStrt #%LdResStop
List of abbreviations:
ARstrt .. Actual Absolute reserve in kW or kVA - for engine start calculation.
ARstp .. Actual Absolute reserves in kW or kVA - for engine stop calculation.
RRstrt .. Actual Relative reserve in % - for engine start calculation.
RRstp .. Actual Relative reserves in % - for engine stop calculation.
ΣPgNom .. Sum of Nominal power of all gen-sets on the bus.
ΣPg*Nom .. Sum of Nominal power of all gen-sets on the bus apart of the one, which is going to be stopped.
ΣPgAct .. Sum of Actual power of all gen-sets on the bus = system load.
BaseLd .. Baseload is given by the setpoint #System BaseLoad (page 171)
Note: System starting sequences may be very different due to their complexity (i.e. gen-sets which do not take
part in power management, various nominal powers etc.). Each system should be considered individually.
Starting sequence
As written above, the power management is based on the load evaluation in order to provide enough of available
running power. An additional gen-set starts when the load of the system raises above certain level to keep the
load reserve big enough. Following figure depicts the situation when an additional gen-set is requested to join
the already running gen-set(s) to the bus.

Image 5.16 Start sequence of power management
As shown above, the load of the system has increased above the level defined by the start condition – i.e. the
load reserve is not sufficient as required by the appropriate setpoint. Further explanation is provided in chapters
Absolute power management (page 82) and Relative power management (page 85).
The level is illustrated by the green dashed line. If the load reserve keeps insufficient for longer time than defined
by the setpoint #Next Engine Start Delay (page 198), the next gen-set is actually started. The standard starting
sequence follows. Once the synchronization procedure is done, the GCB breaker is closed and the gen-set
power is ramping up. Once loaded, the system load reserve is raised and becomes sufficient again. Please note
the sum of nominal power of all gen-sets on the bus is increased by the nominal power of the additional gen-set.
Stopping sequence
As it is written above, the power management is based on the load evaluation in order to provide enough of
available running power. An additional gen-set stops when the load of the system drops below certain level to
avoid inefficient run of the gen-set. Following figure depicts the situation when a gen-set is requested to stop
due to the power management.

Image 5.17 Stopping sequence of power management
As shown above, the system load has decreased below the level defined by the stop condition – i.e. the load
reserve is over a limit given by the appropriate setpoint. Further explanation is provided in chapters Absolute
power management (page 82) and Relative power management (page 85).
The level is illustrated by the red dashed line. If the load reserve keeps over this limit for longer time than defined
by setpoint #Next Engine Stop Delay (page 198), the next gen-set is actually requested to stop. Once the gen-set
is unloaded, the GCB breaker is opened. Please note the sum of nominal power of all gen-sets on the bus is
decreased by the nominal power of the stopped gen-set. The cooling sequence follows before the gen-set is
actually stopped. The gen-set is ready to be started if the system load increases again.
Absolute power management

The power management based on absolute load reserves can be successfully used in cases the load portions
are similar to the gen-set capacity or even bigger. The goal of the absolute reserve mode is to provide the same
load reserve all the time independently on how many gen-sets are currently running. The mode perfectly fits for
industrial plants with large loads.
The absolute power management guarantees adjustable load reserve in kW. This mode is active when #Power
Management Mode (page 192) is set to ABS [kW] mode.

Image 5.18 Power management based on absolute load reserve
Example: An example of absolute power management is shown on the figure below. There are three gen-
sets with following choice of setpoints:
#Power #Priority #Starting #Stopping

Nominal Power
Gen-set management Priority Auto Load Load
power management
mode Swap Reserve X Reserve X
Gen-set
200 kW ENABLED ABS (kW) 1 DISABLED 100 kW 125 kW
#1
Gen-set
500 kW ENABLED ABS (kW) 2 DISABLED 100 kW 125 kW
#2
Gen-set
1 000 kW ENABLED ABS (kW) 3 DISABLED 100 kW 125 kW
#3

Image 5.19 Absolute power management example
As it is shown on both figures above, the additional gen-set is added once the actual load reserve is below the
level given by the appropriate setpoint of load reserve. The additional gen-set is removed once the actual load
reserve is above the level set by appropriate setpoint of load reserve.
The green dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional gen-set is requested to start. This value
of the load value is linked with the setpoint #Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 193) (or other selected reserve set) in
following way:
Sum of nominal power for start - #Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 193) (or other selected reserve set) = value of
load when additional gen-set requested to start (e.g.: 700 kW – 100 kW = 600 kW).
The red dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional gen-set is requested to stop. This value of
the load value is linked with the setpoint #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 194) (or other selected reserve set) in
following way:
Sum of nominal power for stop - #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 194) (or other selected reserve set) = value of
load when additional gen-set requested to stop (e.g.: 700 kW – 125 kW = 575 kW).

There are 2 sets of setpoints for starting and stopping gen-sets in absolute power management.
#Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 193) and #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 194)
#Starting Load Reserve 2 (page 195) and #Stopping Load Reserve 2 (page 196) considered if binary input LOAD
RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 430) is activated
Note: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same load reserve set
selected.
Relative power management

The power management based on relative load reserves perfectly fits to those applications with such load
portions connected to the group at once are much lower than the gen-set nominal power. This mode helps to
achieve the maximal lifetime of the gen-sets, as they can be operated within optimal load range. The maximal
size of the load connected at once depends on number of actually working gen-sets. The more gen-sets are
connected to the bus bar the bigger load portion can be connected at once.
The relative power management guarantees that the engines are not continuously loaded more than to a certain
level. This mode is active when #Power Management Mode (page 192) is set to REL [%] mode.
Image 5.20 Power management based on relative load reserve

Example: An example of relative power management is shown on the figure below. There are three gen-sets
with following choice of setpoints:
#Power #Priority #Starting #Stopping

Nominal Power
Gen-set management Priority Auto Rel Load Rel Load
power management
mode Swap Reserve X Reserve X
Gen-set
200 kW ENABLED REL (%) 1 DISABLED 35 % 40 %
#1
Gen-set
500 kW ENABLED REL (%) 2 DISABLED 35 % 40 %
#2
Gen-set
1 000 kW ENABLED REL (%) 3 DISABLED 35 % 40 %
#3
Image 5.21 Relative power management example

As it is shown on both figures above, the additional gen-set is added once the actual load reserve is below the
level given by the appropriate setpoint of load reserve. The additional gen-set is removed once the actual load
reserve is above the level set by appropriate setpoint of load reserve.
The green dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional gen-set is requested to start. This value
of the load value is linked with the setpoint #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 194) (or other selected reserve
set) in following way:
(100 % - #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 194) (or other selected reserve set)) * Sum of Nominal power =
Value of load when additional gen-set requested to start in kW (in % of nominal power), e.g.: (100 % – 35 %) *
700 kW = 455 kW (65 % of nominal power).
The red dashed line depicts the value of load at which the additional gen-set is requested to stop. This value of
the load value is linked with the setpoint #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 195) (or other selected reserve set)
in following way:
(100 % - #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 195) (or other selected reserve set)) * Sum of Nominal power =
Value of load when additional gen-set requested to stop in kW (in % of nominal power), e.g.: (100 % – 40 %) *
700 kW = 420 kW (60 % of nominal power).
There are 2 sets of setpoint for starting and stopping gen-sets in relative power management.
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 194) and #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 195)
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 196) and #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 197) considered if binary
input LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 430) is activated
Note: All controllers cooperating together in Power management must have the same load reserve set
selected.
Priority auto swap

There is also the option of automatic priority selection. The controllers are sharing data concerning the running
hours and all important information relevant to the actual load. Thanks to the Automatic priority swapping
function the controllers choose the gen-set(s) to be running with consideration of their running hours and the
actual load.
The running hours equalization function keeps a constant maximal difference of gen-set’s running hours. The
efficient function keeps running only the gen-sets with suitable nominal power to avoid inefficient fuel
consumption or gen-set overload.
Note: The function sets the order of gen-sets by virtual values “engine priority”.
Run hours equalization

The gen-sets engine priorities are automatically swapped to balance engine running hours. In other words, the
controllers compare running hours of each gen-set and select gen-set(s) to run in order to maintain constant
maximal difference of running hours. Up to 32 controllers are supported. This function is activated via setpoint
#Priority Auto Swap (page 192) = RUN HOURS.
The value of running hours which is used in run hours equalization is calculated by following formula:
RHE = Running Hours (page 380) - Run Hours Base (page 200)
RHE is considered value for running hours equalization, Running Hours (page 380) is a cumulative sum of run
hours available in statistic values of the controller, Run Hours Base (page 200) is a setpoint. This setpoint may be
used in the case of gen-sets with different runs hours are intended to be set at the same initial point (e.g. a new
gen-set and a used gen-set after retrofit maintenance inspection).

The Running hours equalization function compares RHE value of each controller in the group. Once the
difference between RHE of individual controllers is higher than #Run Hours Max Difference (page 200) (i.e. #Run
Hours Max Difference (page 200) + 1), the gen-set(s) with the lowest RHE is/are started.
Example: The system structure and its settings is shown on the figure below.
Image 5.22 Example of the system
3 cases are considered:

Case #1: 2 gen-gets available
Case #2: 3 gen-gets available with same initial RHE.
Case #3: 3 gen-gets available with different initial RHE.
Case #1:
Gen-set 1 running hours = 250 -> running hours considered in RHE = 100 (150 - Run Hours Base (page 200))
Gen-set 2 running hours = 450 -> running hours considered in RHE = 200 (250 - Run Hours Base (page 200))
Both gen-sets have the same nominal power of 700 kW. Originally, priority of gen-sets was G1 = 2, G2 = 1.
Load demand in this example is constant and it is 500 kW (i.e. only one engine is running at any time). In this
case, the controllers set the engine priority of the gen-set 1 to 1 because it has the lowest considered RHE and
the difference between RHE2 (i.e. considered RHE of gen-set 2) and RHE1 is higher than #Run Hours Max
Difference (page 200) that is set to 10h.
Run hours #RunHoursBase RHE

Gen-set #1 250 150 100
Gen-set #2 450 250 200
The gen-set 1 runs for 100 hours to equalize the RHE of both gen-sets. The gen-set 1 keeps running until the
difference between RHE1 and RHE2 exceeds #Run Hours Max Difference (page 200) (i.e. 10h). The gen-set 1
runs 100 + #Run Hours Max Difference (page 200) + 1 = 100 + 10 + 1 = 111 hours. After 111 hours the gen-sets 2
has the lowest RHE and the difference between RHE1 and RHE2 is higher than #Run Hours Max Difference
(page 200). The gen-set 2 runs 11 hours to equalize the RHE of both gen-sets and then additional #Run Hours
Max Difference (page 200) + 1 hours (i.e. 11 + 10 + 1 = 22 hours). The evolution of RHE1 and RHE2 is shown on
the figure below.

Image 5.23 Run hours equalization - case #1
Step 0 1 2 3 4 5
RHE1 100 211 211 233 233 255
RHE2 200 200 222 222 244 244
Run G1 (ΔRHE1) 0 111 0 22 0 22
Run G2 (ΔRHE2) 0 0 22 0 22 0
From the example of the case #1, it can be concluded that the gen-sets are swapped after the duration
determined by following formula:
SwapTime = Second lowest considered running hours – Current lowest considered running hours + #Run Hours
Max Difference (page 200) +1
Case #2:
Gen-set 1 running hours = 0 -> running hours considered in RHE = 0 (0-RunHoursBase)
Each gen-set has the same RHE = 0 h. By applying the SwapTime formula, we get the run time of gen-set 1
before next swapping:
SwapTimeG1 = 0 – 0 + 10 + 1 = 11
Similar way, we get the run time of gen-set 2 before next swapping:
SwapTimeG2 = 11 – 11 + 10 + 1 = 11
Finally, we get the run time of gen-set 3 before next swapping:
SwapTimeG2 = 11 – 0 + 10 + 1 = 22
Please refer to figure below to understand the evolution of RHE of gen-sets in this particular case.

step 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
RHE1 0 11 11 11 11 33 33 33 33 55 55 55 55 77
RHE2 0 0 11 11 22 22 33 33 44 44 55 55 66 66
RHE3 0 0 0 22 22 22 22 44 44 44 44 66 66 66
Run G1 (ΔRHE1) 0 11 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22
Run G2 (ΔRHE2) 0 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0
Run G3 (ΔRHE3) 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 22 0 0
Case #3:
The gen-set 1 has the lowest RHE1 = 100 h. By applying the SwapTime formula, we get the run time of gen-set
2 before next swapping:
SwapTimeG1 = 200 – 100 + 10 + 1 = 111
Till the step 5, the evolution of the gen-set swapping is the same as in the case #1, just gen-set 1 and gen-set 2
involve. In the step 6 the gen-set 2 can run only 17 hours (previously 22 hours) because the gen-set 3 involves.
The evolution of RHE1, RHE2 and RHE3 is shown on the figure below.

step 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
RHE1 100 211 211 232 233 255 255 255 272 272 272 288 288 288
RHE2 200 200 222 222 244 244 261 261 261 277 277 277 294 294
RHE3 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 266 266 266 283 283 283 299
Run G1
0 111 0 22 0 22 0 0 17 0 0 16 0 0
(ΔRHE1)
Run G2
0 0 22 0 22 0 17 0 0 16 0 0 17 0
(ΔRHE2)
Run G3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 17 0 0 16
(ΔRHE3)
Note: Setting #Run Hours Max Difference (page 200) = 5 does not mean that gen-sets swap every 5 hours. The
Swap time is determined by the formula stated above. Please read the entire chapter Running hours
equalization for better understanding.
Note: In the case #Run Hours Max Difference (page 200) is set to 0 and all gen-set in the group are at the same
initial point (RHE are equal), the gen-set swapping happens every hour.
Efficiency
The gen-sets engine priorities are automatically swapped to best fit to the actual load demand (load demand
swap - LDS). Also engine running hours are taken to the calculation (run hours equalization - RHE). This
function is activated via setpoint #Priority Auto Swap (page 192) = Efficiency.
Algorithm of function:
In the first step, the gen-sets are sorted according to their nominal power.
In the second step, the gen-sets with the same nominal power are sorted according to their RHE
The gen-set(s) with nominal power which fits the most actual load demand are chosen. From those with
same nominal power, the gen-set(s) with lowest RHE are chosen. Selection formula:
#Power Management Mode (page 192) = ABS (kW)
Nominal power of gen-set > actual load demand + #Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 193)
#Power Management Mode (page 192) = REL (%)
Nominal power of gen-set > (actual load demand × 100)/(100 - #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page
194))
If two or more gen-sets are available for taking over the load always the one with the lowest CAN address is
chosen.
If load demand is higher than nominal power of the biggest gen-set, this one is fixed and the whole process
repeats from point the third bullet.
Example: The system structure and its settings is shown on the figure below.

Image 5.26 Example of the system
Following table provide an example of gen-set selection in function of system load evolution. The table is an
example of Efficiency priority optimization function (#Power Management Mode (page 192) = ABS (kW) and
#Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 193) = 20 kW).
System Total Running power Relative load

Running gen-sets Description
Load [kW] within PM [kW] of gen-sets [%]
40 5 100 40
60 5 100 60
5 2 start
80 LDS Swap 300 26
2 [0h] 5 stop
100 2 [10h] 200 50
120 2 [20h] 200 60
2 [30h] 3 start
120 RHE Swap 400 30
3 [10h] 2 stop
120 3 [20h] 200 60
140 3 [30h] 200 70
3 [40h] 1 start
180 LDS Swap 500 36
1 3 stop
200 1 300 67
240 1 300 80
1
280 5 start Gen#5 joins (LDS) 400 70
5
1
340 400 85
5
1
4 start
380 5 LDS + RHE Swap 600 63
5 stop
4 [20h]
1
400 500 80
4

1
440 500 88
4
1
480 4 5 start Gen#5 joins (LDS) 600 80
5
1
540 4 600 90
5
1
4 2 start
580 LDS Swap 800 73
5 5 stop
2 [30h]
1
600 4 700 86
2
1
640 4 700 91
2
1
4
680 5 start Gen#5 joins (LDS) 800 85
2
5
1
4
740 800 93
2
5
1
4
3 start
780 2 LDS Swap 1000 78
5 stop
5
3 [40h]
1
4
800 900 89
2
3

1
4
840 900 93
2
3
1
4
880 2 5 start Gen#5 joins (LDS) 1000 88
3
5
1
4
940 2 1000 94
3
5
Minimal running power

Minimum Running Power function is used to adjust a minimum value of the sum of nominal power of all running
gen-sets. If the function is active, then the gen-sets would not be stopped, although the reserve for stop is
fulfilled. Function is activated via logical binary input Min Run Power Active (page 430).

Image 5.27 Minimal running power
Setpoint #Min Run Power (page 197) is adjusted to 400 kW. Once the MIN RUN POWER ACTIVE (PAGE 430) is
activated, the available nominal running power has to be equal or higher to 400 kW. Even if the load reserve is
big enough to stop the gen-set #2 (nominal power 500 kW), the gen-set keeps running as at least 400 kW has to
be available. The gen-set#1 (nominal power 200 kW) is not enough.
5.4.4 Control groups

The physical group of the gen-sets (i.e. the site) can be separated into smaller logical groups, which can work
independently even if they are interconnected by the CAN2 bus. The logical groups are intended to reflect the
real topology of the site when the site is divided into smaller gen-set groups separated from each other by bus-
tie breakers. If the bus-tie breakers are closed the sub-groups have to work as one large group and if the bus-tie
breakers are open, the sub-groups have to work independently.
The group which the particular controller belongs to is adjusted by the setpoint Control Group (page 201).
Use the defaulf setting 1 with all controllers, if there is no bus-tie breaker.
The information which groups are currently linked together is being distributed via the CAN. Each controller
can provide information about one BTB breaker. The breaker position is detected by the input function
GroupLink (i.e. this input is to be connected to the breaker feedback).

The two groups which are connected together by the BTB, are defined with parameters Group Link L (page
201) and Group Link R (page 202).
Controller sends via CAN2 bus information that controllers from groups Group Link L and Group Link R are
linked together, if the Group link function (signal associated with the function) is active. It sends information
that the groups are separated, if the Group link function is not active.
Note: The "group link" function is independent on the group, where the controller itself belongs to. The controller
can provide "group link" information about any two groups and it may not belong to one of the groups.
All gensets/controllers in linked groups cooperate with each other and perform load sharing, VAr sharing and
power management together. These functionalities are performed independently in each group, when the
groups are separated.
Example:
4 gen-sets separated by a BTB breaker into two groups of 2. The BTB position is detected by the controllers 2
and 3. The reason, why there are 2 controllers used for detection of the BTB position, is to have a backup source
of the group link information, if the primary source (controller) is switched off.
Image 5.28 Example of control groups
Once the BTB breaker is closed, the control groups 2 and 3 become new group 2+3. Power management, load
sharing and VAr sharing are performed within newly established group 2+3. Merging of the groups may result
with a genset stopping, if power management evaluates that available Actual Reserve is high enough to stop a
genset.
5.4.5 Distributed power management signals

Sharing of multiple Logical Binary Input (LBI) functions is critical for power management system operation,
because several power management functionalities require simultaneous activation of LBI functions in
controllers, which are involved in power management operation. It can be done either automatically using CAN2
bus link between controllers or using dedicated LBI functions.

These LBI functions are shared automatically:
System Start/Stop
Note: InteliMains controller activates the System Start/Stop signal in case of all system activations (e.g. AMF,
TEST Mode, ...)
Min Run Power Act

Load Res 2 Active
MCB Feedback
These rules applies to the automatic sharing of the selected signals:
1. LBI state is automatically shared via CAN2 bus, if corresponding LBI function is configured in a controller.
Example: Logical input Remote Start/Stop is configured with a controller. State of the signal is
automatically transmitted to other controllers via CAN2 bus as System Start/Stop.
2. LBI state received from CAN2 bus is automatically used, if corresponding LBI function is not configured in a
controller.
Example: LBI Remote Start/Stop is not configured with a controller, but automatically shared
System Start/Stop is received from CAN2 bus. Controller follows state of the shared LBI signal then.

3. LBI state received from CAN2 bus is not used, if corresponding LBI function is configured in a controller.
Example: LBI Remote Start/Stop is configured with a controller. Controller follows only state of
signal linked with the Remote Start/Stop function. The function is not activated by a shared System
Start/Stop signal.

4. LBI function state transmitted via CAN2 bus is used only by controllers, which are in the same group as
controller, which is source of the shared signal. Signal coming from controller in a different group is accepted
only if the “source controller” group is linked with the “receiving controller” group.

5. LBI function can be configured with multiple controllers, which transmit through CAN2 bus state of the
function. OR function applies to the function evaluation in controllers, in which the function is not configured.
It means that function is activated by shared signal coming from any controller (rule 4. applies).
5.4.6 Regulation loops

Regulation loops overview
Regulation loops overview
Loop type Related applications Related setpoints

Frequency MINT, SPtM, MCB, MGCB Frequency Gain (page 202), Frequency Int (page 202)
Voltage MINT, SPtM, MCB, MGCB Voltage Gain (page 203), Voltage Int (page 203)
Angle regulation MINT, SPtM, MCB, MGCB Angle Gain (page 203)
Speed, Frequency, Load sharing, Load regulation loops have one common output = Speed request. The value of
this output is always composed from the contribution of each of the regulation loops.

Voltage, PF, VAr sharing have one common output = Voltage request. The value of this output is always
composed from the contribution of each of the regulation loop.
Note: All regulation loops are PID, but only PI components are visible as setpoints.
Adjustment of regulation loops

The regulation loops have two adjustable factors: P-factor and I-factor (except angle regulation loop, which has
P-factor only). The P-factor (gain) influences the stability and overshoot of the regulation loop and the I-factor
(int) influences the steady-state error as well as the settling time. See the picture below for typical responses of
a PI regulation loop.
Image 5.29 Typical responses of PI regulator
For manual tuning of a control loop use following method:

Set both the I-factor and P-factor to 0.
Increase the P-factor slightly until the system starts to oscillate.
Adjust the P-factor back to approx. one half of the value where the oscillations started.
Increase the I-factor slightly to achieve optimal resulting response.
IMPORTANT: Be ready to press emergency stop button in case the regulation loop would start to
behave unacceptable while it is being adjusted.
5.4.7 Frequency control

The frequency control output is used to control the frequency of the engines presented on the bus. The
frequency regulation, load regulation and load sharing are realized through the Loadsharing Output. The
frequency request is internal value of the regulator. This value is transformed to range 0...100% of the
Loadsharing Output which comes out of the controller via communication line. Gen-set controller accept this
value and transform this to his speed control output.

Load control adjustment
Synchronization adjustment
Start the system in MAN Mode.
In case of MCB application follow the synchronization procedure over the GCB according to rules described
in particular gen-set guide.
To start the synchronization press MGCB ON/OFF button. MGCB LED starts to flash to indicate
synchronization. To stop synchronization press again MGCB ON/OFF .
Adjust Frequency Gain (page 202) to unstable speed control and decrease value by 30 % to insure stable
performance.
Adjust Frequency Int (page 202) to stable (fast and smooth) slip control. Synchroscope movement on the
controller measure screen should slow down and stop (in any position, because Angle Gain (page 203)
control is off).
Set Angle Gain (page 203). Synchroscope on the controller measure screen should move slowly and stop in
“up“ position. Set Angle Gain (page 203) to unstable value (synchroscope swings) and decrease value by
30 % to insure stable performance.
5.4.8 Voltage PF control

The voltage control output is used to control the voltage or the power factor of the system. The voltage
regulation, PF regulation and VAr sharing are realized through the voltage control. The voltage request is internal
value of the regulator. This value is transformed to range 0...100% of the Varsharing Output which comes out of
the controller via communication line. Gen-set controller accept this value and transform this to his AVR control
output.
Voltage/PF control adjustment

Voltage adjustment
Set Voltage Gain (page 203), Voltage Int (page 203) to zero.
Start the gen-set in MAN Mode to without load.
When gen-set is running unloaded (bus voltage is present) increase carefully Voltage Gain (page 203) to
unstable point and then decrease value by 30 % to insure stable performance.
Adjust Voltage Int (page 203) (usually setting to 100% gives optimal performance).
5.4.9 Electric state machine

Init Initialization mode of controller. The application is not activated.
BrksOff MCB, MGCB opened
Island operation
IslOper
Example: MCB is opened, (M)GCB is closed
Mains is present and all its values are within limits.
MainsOper
Example: MCB is closed, (M)GCB is opened
ParalOper Gen-set is in parallel with mains (MCB is closed, (M)GCB is closed)

RevSync Mains is synchronized to presented bus (MCB is opened, (M)GCB closed)
Synchro Gen-set is synchronizing (MCB is closed, GCB is opened)
MainsFlt Mains fails
MainsRet Mains recover
ValidFlt State activated after Emergency start del
MCB Off Mains breaker is opened
Controller mode, where the LBI Emergency manual is activated. All control functions are
EmergMan
stopped
5.4.10 Alarm management

The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. Level 1 – yellow alarm – is a pre-critical alarm that is only
informative and does not take any action regarding gen-set control. Level 2 – red alarm – represents a critical
situation, where an action must be taken to prevent damage of the gen-set or technology.
One alarm of any type can be assigned to each binary input.
Two alarms (one yellow and one red type) can be assigned to each analog input.
There are also Built-in alarms (page 106) with fixed alarm types.
Each alarm is written to the Alarmlist (page 106).
Each alarm causes a record to be written into the history log.
Each alarm activates the Alarm and Horn output.
Each alarm can cause sending of a SMS message or an email.
Image 5.30 Analog input alarm evaluation principle
Alarm handling
If an alarm is being evaluated and the appropriate alarm condition is fulfilled, the delay of evaluation will start to
run. The delay is adjustable by a setpoint (in the case of built-in alarms, analog input alarms) or is adjusted via
configuration window in InteliConfig (in the case of binary input alarms). If the conditions persist, the alarm will
activate. The alarm will not activate if the condition is dismissed while the delay is still running.

After pressing the Fault reset button or activating the binary input FAULT RESET BUTTON (PAGE 428), all active
alarms change to confirmed state. Confirmed alarms will disappear from the Alarmlist as soon as the respective
condition dismisses. If the condition is dismissed before acknowledging the alarm, the alarm will remain in the
Alarmlist as Inactive.
Alarm states
An alarm can have following states:
Active alarm: the alarm condition persists, alarm delay has elapsed.
Inactive alarm: the alarm condition has disappeared, but the alarm has not been confirmed.
Confirmed alarm: the alarm condition persists, but the alarm has already been confirmed.
Image 5.31 Alarm List
Alarm types - Level 1

The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level. This alarm does not cause any actions regarding the gen-set control.
Warning (Wrn)
The alarm appears in the Alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. Activates the output AL COMMON W RN
(PAGE 438) as well as the standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 459) and ALARM (PAGE 439)).
Alarm indication (AL Indic)

The event is only indicated in the Alarmlist. It disappears for the alarmist automatically as soon as the cause
disappears. Standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 459) and ALARM (PAGE 439)) are not activated.
History record only (HistRecOnl)

The event is recorded into the history. Standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 459) and ALARM (PAGE 439)) are
not activated.
Alarm types - Level 2

The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached.
Note: It is not possible to start the engine if any red level protection is active or not confirmed.
IMPORTANT: The gen-set can start by itself after acknowledging the alarms if there is no longer an
active red alarm and the controller is in AUTO or TEST mode!

Breaker open protection
The alarm appears in the alarmlist and is recorded into the history log. There can be two types of breaker open
protection.
Breaker open (BO) - this protection is not visible in alarmlist
Breaker open with Reset (BOR) - this protection is visible in alarmlist and must be confirmed to deactivate
the protection.
Activates the output AL COMMON BO (PAGE 1) respective AL COMMON BOR (PAGE 437) as well as the
standard alarm outputs (HORN (PAGE 459) and ALARM (PAGE 439)).
Sensor fail detection (FLS)

If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor fail will be detected and a
sensor fail message will appear in the Alarmlist (page 106). The valid range is defined by the most-left (RL)
and most-right (RH) points of the sensor characteristic ±12.5% from RH-RL.
Note: Sometimes there can be problem with lower limit of valid range which can be counted as negative
number. In this case the lower limit is set as one half of the RL point of the sensor curve characteristic.
Image 5.32 Sensor fail detection principle
Remote alarm messaging

If communication plug-in module is connected to the controller, the controller can send SMS messages and
emails at the moment when a new alarm appears in the Alarmlist (page 106) or new event is written in History
log (page 107). The message will contain a copy of the Alarmlist (page 106) or reasons from History log
(page 107). To enable this function, adjust setpoints Event Message (page 286), Wrn Message (page 287), BOC
Message (page 287) and Sd Messages (page 287) to ON. Also enter a valid GSM phone number or email address
to the setpoints Telephone Number 1 (page 281), Telephone Number 2 (page 281), Telephone Number 3 (page
282), Telephone Number 4 (page 282), Email Address 1 (page 284) Email Address 2 (page 285)Email Address 3
(page 285), and Email Address 4 (page 285).
The list of all supported terminals shows the table below:

Event Warning BOC Shutdown Event Warning BOC Shutdown
Terminal
SMS SMS SMS SMS email email email email
CM-RS232-485 no no no no no no no no
CM-Ethernet no no no no yes yes yes yes
no no
no
CM-GPRS yes yes yes yes yes* yes* noyes*yes*
yes*yes*
yes* yes*
no no
no
CM-4G-GPS yes yes yes yes yes* yes* noyes*yes*
yes*yes*
yes* yes*
Note: * Only with enabled Mode (page 274).
Note: * Only with enabled Mode (page 274).
Alarmlist
Alarmlist is a container of active and inactive alarms. It will appear automatically on the controller display, if a
new alarm occurs, or can be displayed manually from the display menu.
Active alarms are shown as inverted, not yet confirmed alarms are marked with asterisk before them.
Alarmlist contains three types of alarms:
Controller built-in alarms
User configured alarms on binary or analog inputs
Controller built-in alarms

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC,
Stp, MP, MPR). Then the alarm name follows. In some cases the prefix can be omitted.
User configured alarms

An alarm message in the alarmlist begins with a prefix, which represents the alarm type (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC,
MP, MPR). Alarm type is selected by user during the configuration of binary or analog input as alarm. Then the
alarm name follows. Name is adjusted by user during the configuration of binary or analog input as alarm.
Built-in alarms
Events Protection
Description
specification type
Battery voltage is out of limits given by Battery Undervoltage (page
Wrn Battery Voltage WRN
180) and Battery Overvoltage (page 180) setpoints.
Binary input Configurable Warning/MP/MPR alarms on the binary inputs.
RTC Battery Flat WRN RTC battery weak or flat and has to be changed.
Wrong check-sum of parameters. Happens typically after downloading
new firmware or changing of the parameter. The controller stays in
Parameters Fail NONE
INIT mode. Check all parameters, change value of at least one
parameter.

Events Protection
Description
specification type
Wrn Bus Lx >V
Wrn Bus Lx <V Hist Bus voltage is out of limits given by Bus < and Bus > Voltage setpoint.
(where x=1,2,3)
The bus frequency is out of limits given by Bus Right Overfrequency
Bus >, <Frequency Hist
(page 184) and Bus Right Underfrequency (page 184) setpoints.
Bus Voltage The bus voltage is unbalanced more than the value of Bus Right
Hist
Unbalance Voltage Unbalance (page 183).
The mains current is unbalanced more than the value of Current
Current Unbalance MP
Unbalance (page 188) setpoint.
Mains current exceeds the limit for IDMT protection given by Nominal
Current IDMT MPR
Current (page 175) and IDMT Overcurrent (page 187) setpoints.
Short circuit current alarm is activated when the current value is out of
Short Circuit MPR
limits given by Short Circuit BOR (page 186)
BTB Fail WRN Failure of mains circuit breaker.
Bus voltage phases are not wired correctly. MGCB closing is
Bus CCW Rot WRN
prohibited by controller.
Wrn
WRN If the synchronization timeout gets elapsed (forward synchronization).
Synchronization Fail
Bus Meas Error WRN Bus measurement error. Bus voltage is out of limits for 20s.
Note: This table does not contain all alarms in controller. It is only list of the most common alarms.
5.4.11 History log

The history log is an area in the controller’s non-volatile memory that records “snapshots” of the system at
moments when important events occur. The history log is important especially for diagnostics of failures and
problems. When the history file is full, the oldest records are removed.
Each record has the same structure and contains:
• The event which caused the record (e.g. “Overspeed alarm” or “GCB closed”)
• The date and time when it was recorded
• All important data values like RPM, kW, voltages, etc. from the moment that the event occurred.
Record structure
Name Abbreviation Description

Row number (0 corresponds to the last record, -1 to the previous
Number No.
one, etc.)
Reason Reason Reason for history record (any event or alarm related to the gen-set
Time Time Time
Date Date Date
Bus Right Brfrq Bus Right Frequency

Frequency
Bus Right Voltage Vbr1 Bus Right voltage Ph1
Bus Left Frequency Brfrq Bus Left Frequency
Bus Left Voltage Vbl1 Bus Left voltage Ph1
Bus Left Current IL1 Bus Left current Ph1
Voltage Battery VBat Voltage of battery
Binary Inputs BIN Controller binary inputs
Binary Outputs BOUT Controller binary outputs
Running nominal
TRPN Nominal power of all running gen-sets
power
Available nominal
APN Available nominal power of all gen-sets
power
Controller Mode Mode Controller mode
Note: When some setpoint is changed, in history log is written its number of communication object.
Note: Some additional columns can be added due to actual controller configuration (modules, etc.).
5.4.12 Breaker control

The following power switches are controlled by the controller:
TheBus Tie breaker or contactor – BTB
It is possible to use either a motorized circuit breaker or contactor. Below is a list of available control outputs
that should fit all types of contactors or breakers. The following rules must be kept to when designing the wiring
of power switches:
The control outputs must be configured and wiring of the power switches must be provided in such a way,
that the controller has full control over the breakers – i.e. the controller can open and close the breaker at any
time.
The breaker must respond within max. 2 seconds to a close and open command. Special attention should be
paid to opening of motorized circuit breakers, as it could take more than 2 seconds on some types. In such
cases it is necessary to use an undervoltage coil for fast opening.

After opening the breaker, there is internal delay for another closing of breaker. Delay is 6 seconds - 5
seconds for OFF coil and 1 second for UV coil. After these 6 seconds, breaker can be closed again. For
opening of breaker there is no delay.
Breaker control outputs
An output for control of a contactor. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
Close/Open controller. The breaker must react within 2 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise
an alarm is issued.
An output giving a 2 second pulse in the moment the breaker has to be closed. The output is
ON coil
intended for control of close coils of circuit breakers.
An output giving a pulse in the moment the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until
OFF coil the feedback deactivates, but at least for 2 seconds. The output is intended for control of
open coils of circuit breakers.
The GCB UV coil output is active the whole time the gen-set is running (not in idle or cooling).
The MCB UV coil output is active when the controller is switched on. The output is
UV coil
deactivated for at least 2 seconds in the moment the breaker has to be switched off. The
output is intended for control of undervoltage coils of circuit breakers.
Image 5.33 Breaker control outputs
Breaker fail detection

Breaker fail detection is based on binary output breaker close/open comparing with binary input breaker
feedback.
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to configure breaker feedback to use this function.
IMPORTANT: Also it is possible to use breakers without feedbacks. In this case there is no check
of breaker real state.
There are three different time delays for breaker fail detection – see following diagrams.

IMPORTANT: When controller is synchronizing, there is only 2 seconds delay for breaker fail
detection.
When binary output breaker close/open is in steady state and breaker feedback is changed the breaker fail is
detected immediately (no delay).
Image 5.34 Breaker fail - breaker close/open in steady position - open
Image 5.35 Breaker fail - breaker close/open in steady position - close
When binary output breaker close/open opens there is 2 sec delay for breaker fail detection.
Image 5.36 Breaker fail - breaker close/open opens

When binary output breaker close/open closes there is 2 sec delay for breaker fail detection.
Image 5.37 Breaker fail - breaker close/open closes
5.4.13 Exercise timers

The exercise (general-purpose) timers in controller areis intended for scheduling of any operations such as e.g.
periodic tests of the gen-set, scheduled transfer of the load to the gen-set prior to an expected disconnection of
the mains etc.
Related setpoints for timer 1 are:
Timer 1 Function (page 250) Timer 1 Day (page 254)
Timer 1 Repetition (page 250) Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week (page 255)
Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 251) Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 255)
Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 251) Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 255)
Timer 1 Duration (page 251) Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 253)
Timer 1 Repeated (page 252) Timer 1 Weekends (page 254)
Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 254)


Available modes of each timer:
This is a single shot mode. The timer will be activated only once at preset date/time for preset
Once
duration.
The timer is activated every "x-th" day. The day period "x" is adjustable. Weekends can be
Daily
excluded. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd day excluding Saturdays and Sundays.
The timer is activated every "x-th" week on selected weekdays. The week period "x" is
Weekly
adjustable. E.g. the timer can be adjusted to every 2nd week on Monday and Friday.
The timer is activated every "x-th" month on the selected day. The requested day can be
Monthly selected either as "y-th" day in the month or as "y-th" weekday in the month. E.g. the timer can
be adjusted to every 1st month on 1st Tuesday.
Short
The timer is repeated with adjusted period (hh:mm). The timer duration is included in the period.
period
Once mode
Set-up via InteliConfig
To set-up timer via InteliConfig go to the setpoint ribbon, setpoint group scheduler and setpoint Timer 1 Setup.
Note: First of all function of timer has to be adjusted via setpoint Timer 1 Function (page 250).
Image 5.38 Once mode - InteliConfig
In timer mode select Once. In timer settings adjust date and time of occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration
of timer.
Set-up via controller interface

In controller go to the Scheduler setpoint group. Select the function of timer via Timer 1 Function (page 250)
setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 250) setpoint select Once

mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 251), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 251) and Timer 1
Duration (page 251).
Note: Use left and right buttons to move between timer setpoints.
Daily mode
Image 5.39 Daily mode - InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Daily. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th day of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 253)) and behavior of timer on weekends (Timer 1 Weekends (page 254)).
Example: On image example first start of timer will be 1/1/2016 at 12:00. Duration will be 1 hour. Timer will
be again activated every 3rd day at 12:00 for 1 hour including weekends.

setpoint. Than go to Timer 1 Setup and press enter button. In Timer 1 Repetition (page 250) setpoint select
Repeated mode. Than adjust Timer 1 First Occur. Date (page 251), Timer 1 First Occur. Time (page 251) and
Timer 1 Duration (page 251). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 252) select Daily and adjust Timer 1 Refresh
Period (page 253) (x-th day of repetition) and Timer 1 Weekends (page 254) (behavior of timer on weekends).

Weekly mode
Image 5.40 Weekly mode - InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Weekly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the x-th week of repetition
(Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 253)) and days when timer should be active (Timer 1 Day (page 254)).
be again activated every 2nd week on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

Timer 1 Duration (page 251). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 252) select Weekly and adjust Timer 1 Day
(page 254) (days when timer should be active) and Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 253) (x-th week of repetition).
Monthly mode

There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.
Image 5.41 Monthly mode - InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition and the x-th day of repetition (Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 255)). Than select the x-th month of
repetition.
be again activated every 2nd day in 2nd month at 12:00 for 1 hour.

Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.
Image 5.42 Monthly mode - InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Monthly. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the type of monthly
repetition, the x-th week of repetition and days in week. Than select the x-th month of repetition.
be again activated every 2nd week in 2nd month on Monday, Wednesday and Friday at 12:00 for 1 hour.

There are two types of monthly repetition. First of them is based on repeating one day in month.
Timer 1 Duration (page 251). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 252) select Monthly and adjust type of monthly
repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 254), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 253) (x-th month of repetition) and
Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month (page 255) (concrete day in repeated months).
Second type of monthly repetition is based on repeating days in week in month.
Timer 1 Duration (page 251). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 252) select Monthly and adjust type of monthly
repetition via Timer 1 Repeat Day (page 254), Timer 1 Refresh Period (page 253) (x-th month of repetition), Timer
1 Repeated Day In Week (page 255) (days in week when timer is active) and Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month
(page 255) (concrete week in repeated months).

Short period mode
Image 5.43 Short period mode - InteliConfig
In timer mode select Repeat. In repetition type select Short period. In timer settings adjust date and time of first
occurrence of timer. Also adjust the duration of each occurrence of timer. Than select the interval of repetition
(shorter than 1 day).
be again activated every 4th hour for 1 hour.

Timer 1 Duration (page 251). In setpoint Timer 1 Repeated (page 252) select Short Period and adjust Timer 1
Refresh Period (page 253) (interval of repetition).
5.4.14 Analog switches

There are logical analog function dedicated for analog switches. Each analog switch has setpoints for level ON
and level OFF and logical binary output.

Analog switch Setpoints Binary output
Analog Switch 1 On (page 208)
AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 484) AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 439)
Analog Switch 1 Off (page 208)

Analog switch Setpoints Binary output
The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of the setpoints.
Image 5.44 Principle of analog switch
5.4.15 Voltage phase sequence detection

Controller detects phase sequence on both voltage terminals. This protection is important after controller
installation to avoid wrong voltage phase connection. The phase sequence is adjusted via setpoint Phase
Rotation (page 180). When the phases are connected in different order, following alarms are detected:
Bus CCW Rotation
Bus Left CCW Rotation (page 510)
5.4.16 Sensor curves

Default sensor curves
There are 16 default resistive curves available. The following table provides information on minimum/maximum
values of respective sensors. Actual values especially of temperature curves may differ. Meaning is to prolong
curve to the lower temperature values, so the cold engine will not raise alarm fail sensor.
Curve Min [Ohm] Max [Ohm] Units

VDO 10 Bar 0-2400ohm 0 2400 Bar
VDO40-120°C0-2400ohm 0 2400 °C
VDOLevel%0-2400ohm 0 2400 %
General line 1 0 1000 ohm

Note: Curves can be modified via InteliConfig. In InteliConfig are also prepared some standard curves.
5.4.17 PLC
PLC Editor is powerful tool which helps you to create your own PLC scheme. It has graphical interface to have
user interface easy to use.
Image 5.45 PLC Editor main page

List of available PLC blocks
PLC block Number of blocks

OR/AND 16
XOR/RS 2
Comparator with hysteresis (Comp Hyst) 2
Comparator with delay (Comp Time) 2
Timer 1
Delay 2
Force history record (Force Hist) 2
Force protection (Force Prot) 2
Working with the editor

If the currently opened archive does not contain any PLC program, then an empty drawing is created
automatically when you select the PLC Editor. The procedure of creation of a PLC drawing (program) contains
following essential steps:
Adjust the sheet to your needs. See Working with sheets (page 121) for more information.
Add PLC blocks into the sheets. See Adding PLC blocks (page 122) for more information.
Define inputs and outputs of the PLC program. See Define inputs and outputs (page 123) for more
information.
Create connections between inputs, blocks and outputs. See Creating wires (page 125) for more
information.
Adjust properties of the blocks. See for more information about blocks.
Working with sheets

Drag the sheet edges to re-size the sheet according to your needs.

Image 5.46 Adjusting PLC sheet
Adding PLC blocks

Adding PLC block is simple and intuitive. Follow the procedure below to add PLC block.
Select required block from the list of available PLC blocks at the left and drag it into the sheet.
Double-click on the block and adjust properties of the block. See for more information about blocks.
Connect the block inputs and outputs by drawing wires in the sheet. See Define inputs and outputs (page
123) for more information. It is also possible to connected inputs and outputs via properties of selected PLC
block.

Image 5.47 Adding PLC blocks
Note: To delete PLC block just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can by used.
Note: To see context help for selected PLC block just press F1 button.
Define inputs and outputs
Image 5.48 Blank sheet of PLC editor
Inputs
Sheet inputs are located at the left side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.

Double-click on a free input position or existing input to add new input or edit the existing one.
Select the source for the input.
If you create a binary input, you can select a source from following categories:
Bin. Values - this category contains all binary values available in the controller as binary inputs,
logical binary outputs etc.
PLC Outputs - this category contains all PLC blocks binary outputs available in the controller.
If you create an analog input, you can select a source from following categories:
Ana. Values - this category contains all analog values available in the controller as analog inputs,
electrical values etc.
All Setpoints - this category contains all setpoints of the controller except the dedicated PLC
setpoints. Names, resolutions and dimensions of these setpoints can not be modified.
PLC Setpoints - this category contains a group of setpoints which are dedicated for using in the PLC
program. PLC setpoints can be renamed, their dimension, resolution and limits can be modified
according to need of PLC blocks where they are used.
Image 5.49 PLC inputs

Outputs
Sheet outputs are located at the right side of a sheet. Follow the procedure below to add or edit an input.
Doubleclick on a free output position to add new sheet output.
Doubleclick on an already created output to configure the output onto a controller output terminal or a logical
binary input (first of all some PLC block output has to be connected to this output to enable configuration of
output).
Image 5.50 PLC outputs
IMPORTANT: It is necessary to click on Connect button after selecting the output. Otherwise PLC
output is not connected to output.
Creating wires
Wires can be create between PLC inputs and PLC blocks and between PLC blocks and PLC outputs.
IMPORTANT: Keep the order of starting and finishing connection points. Wires between inputs and
blocks have to start from inputs. Wires between blocks and outputs have to start from blocks.
Follow the procedure below to create wire.

Locate the mouse pointer over the starting point of the wire. If the area under the mouse pointer is a
connection point, the pointer will change the color (fill of pointer will be white).
Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the wire to the destination of required connection point. If you
point over a valid connection point, the connection point will be marked with a red circle.
Release the left mouse button to create a wire between the two points. The wire is routed automatically.
Note: It is possible to make connection only between the outputs and inputs with the same type of value (binary
or analog). Binary values are marker by black pointer, analog values are marked with green pointer.
Note: To delete wire just click on it and press delete button. Also delete selection function can by used.
PLC logic execution rules

The PLC program is executed every 100 ms. The blocks are executed in order according to block numbers (item
numbers), which are indicated in each block. The block numbers are assigned automatically according to
position on sheet.
Image 5.51 PLC execution logic
IMPORTANT: Please always check that the blocks are ordered correctly, especially if you use direct
feedbacks from outputs to inputs within one sheet. Wrong order may lead to incorrect results!!!

Other functions
Consistency check
Use this function to check if all inputs and outputs of PLC block are connected.
Delete whole content of sheet

Use this function to delete the whole content of sheet (including blocks, wires, inputs, outputs, etc...).
Hints
Use this function to enable or disable quick hints for blocks (controller help is not affected by this function).
PLC monitor
PLC monitor is a powerful tool for monitoring your PLC. Just click on PLC monitor button on main InteliConfig
page to see you PLC. Active inputs and outputs have blue color. Also wires with active signals have blue color.
IMPORTANT: It is not possible to edit PLC in PLC monitor tool.
5.4.18 Alternate configuration

In controller are 3 sets of configuration.
Configuration set 1 Configuration set 2 Configuration set 3

Nominal Frequency 3 (page 298)
Nominal Frequency 1 (page 294) Nominal Frequency 2 (page 296)
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page 298)
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 (page 294) Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page 296)
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 (page 295) Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page 297)
299)
Nominal Current 1 (page 295) Nominal Current 2 (page 297)
Nominal Current 3 (page 299)
Connection Type 1 (page 295) Connection type 2 (page 297)
Connection type 3 (page 299)
Configuration sets can be changed via logical binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 401) and logical binary
input ALTERNATE CONFIG 3 (PAGE 401).

5.4.19 USB host
USB host is a function for programming of controller from USB Flash Drive. Following functions are supported:
Firmware upload
Configuration upload
Firmware and configuration upload
Configuration download
Image 5.52 USB host flowchart
Terminology:
The Archive = the native file of InteliConfig, including the complete Configuration + History + Statistic +
Values (in the time of download) + Alarm list.
Configuration = the part of Archive, in the terms of Configuration + Setpoints + PLC + IO definitions +
Languages.
New configuration = the configuration created in InteliConfig for the purpose of uploading it into the controller
using the USB memory stick. The new configuration is recognized due to it’s name. The name has to
contain the specific string ="InteliMains210-Genset name-M.N.P.B.aig3".
Compatible firmware = the firmware version compatible with the configuration in the controller. The name of
file including the firmware is "InteliMains210-M.N.P.B.bin".
Abbreviations:
CU - control unit
FW - firmware
CFG - configuration

Firmware upload
Point 1 - controller detects that USB Flash Drive has been inserted.
If the communication via USB B is running controller will not detect the USB memory key.
On the other hand if the USB memory key was detected, communication via USB B port is not possible.
Point 2 - controller is in OFF mode
All operations with USB memory key are possible only in OFF mode
Point 3 - Conditions for firmware upload with current configuration
The new firmware compatible with the version of the configuration in the controller has been detected
(and there is no new configuration file).
Detection is based on name of firmware - required name: "InteliMains210-M.N.P.B.bin"
There can be stored more firmwares on the USB Flash Drive. Controller automatically select the
compatible firmware with highest version.
Point 4 - Pop-up message
Confirmation of firmware upload with current configuration
Point 5 - Firmware upload
Current archive is download to USB Flash Drive (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM).
New firmware is uploaded into the controller without the change of the configuration
History record "USB Flash Drive FW upgrade" is made
Confirming file (.txt) on USB Flash Drive is made (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM)
Content: Serial number, Year/Date/Time, Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new FW" successful.
Confirmation pop-up message: "FW upgrade success"
Configuration upload
Point 9 - conditions for new configuration upload
The new configuration compatible with the version of the firmware in the controller has been detected
(and there is no new firmware file).
Detection is based on name of configuration - required name: "InteliMains210-Genset name-
M.N.P.B.aig3"
There can be only one configuration file
Confirmation of configuration upload with current firmware

Point 11 - Configuration upload
Current archive is download to USB key (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM).
New configuration is uploaded into the controller without the change of the firmware
History record "USB key CFG upload" is made
Confirming file (.txt) on USB key is made (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM)
Content: Serial number, Year/Date/Time, Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new CFG" successful.
Confirmation pop-up message: "CFG upgrade success"
Firmware and configuration upload

Point 6 - conditions for new firmware and configuration upload
The new configuration has been detected. Also there is firmware file compatible with detected new
configuration
Detection is based on name of configuration - required name: "InteliMains210-Genset name-
M.N.P.B.aig3" and on name of firmware - required name: "InteliMains210-M.N.P.B.bin"
There can be only one configuration file
There can be stored more firmwares on the USB key. Controller automatically select the compatible
firmware with highest version.
Confirmation of configuration and firmware upload
Point 8 - Configuration and firmware upload
New firmware is uploaded into the controller
New configuration is uploaded into the controller
History record "USB key FW and CFG upload" is made
Confirming file (.txt) on USB key is made (Name = SN_YYMMDDHHMM)
Content: Serial number, Year/Date/Time, Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new FW" successful,
Upgrade to the FW "Name of the new CFG" successful.
Confirmation pop-up message: "FW and CFG upgrade success"
Configuration download

Points 3, 6, 9 - conditions for configuration download
There is no firmware or configuration with required name

Confirmation of configuration download
Point 11 - Configuration download
History record "USB key Archive download" is made
Confirmation pop-up message: "Archive download successful"
6 back to Functions

6 Communication
6.1 PC 132
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems 145
6.1 PC
6.1.1 Direct communication 132
6.1.2 Remote communication 134
6.1.1 Direct communication

A RS232, USB, RS485 or ethernet interface can be used for direct cable connection to a PC.
Connection via RS232

A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS232 connection.
The module is plugged into the slot located on the rear side of the controller. To find more information about
installation of the modules see Plug-in module installation on page 39.
RS232 interface uses COM1 Mode (page 263) port of the controller. Use a cross-wired serial communication
cable with DB9 female connectors and signals Rx, Tx, GND.
Note: Also USB-RS232 convertor can be used.
Image 6.1 Cross-wired RS232 cable is used
Image 6.2 Cross-wired RS232 cable and USB is used

Connection via RS485
Plug-in module CM-RS232-485 or on board RS485 connector can be used for communication via RS485
connection.
A plug-in communication module CM-RS232-485 is necessary for communication via RS485 connection.
RS485 interface uses COM2 Mode (page 264) port of the controller.
Note: Also USB-RS485 convertor can be used.
Image 6.3 Plug-in module CM RS232-485 is used
Connection via Ethernet

A plug-in communication module CM-Ethernet is necessary for ethernet connection.
This connection type is used for communication with the controller from InteliConfig or any other PC tool. This
connection can be used regardless of AirGate is switched on or off. Only three remote clients can be connected
at the same time (via AirGate only two remote clients at the same time).
To connect your PC tool to the controller use the INTERNET connection type and just put the CM-Ethernet IP
address into the gen-set address box in the PC tool. If you do not use the default ComAp TCP Port (page 294) 23,
then you also have to specify the port number using a colon.
Image 6.4 Ethernet cable is used
Connection via USB

USB interface uses HID profile.

Image 6.5 Shielded USB type A cable is used
6 back to Communication
6.1.2 Remote communication

A PC can be connected to the controller also remotely via CM-GPRS or CM-Ethernet plug-in module.
IMPORTANT: Factory default password and access code are "0". It is highly recommended to
change these parameters.
Ethernet LAN connection

Direct IP LAN connection is intended to be used if the CM-Ethernet module is reachable from the client
computer by specifying the IP address at which the module can be contacted.
If direct IP connection is to be used within a local network the CM-Ethernet must have static IP address in
the respective local network.
Note: If you have troubles with setting up static and public IP address for direct connection from Internet use
AirGate connection instead.
Image 6.6 Ethernet LAN connection
Setting-up static IP address

There are two basic ways to get the static IP address.
First way is to switch theCM-Ethernet to manual IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode (page
289) to FIXED. In that case all setpoints of IP settings(IP Address (page 290), Subnet Mask (page 290), Gateway
IP (page 290), DNS IP Address 1 (page 291)) have to be adjusted manually. If this method is used several basic
rules should be kept to avoid conflicts with the remaining network infrastructure:

The static IP used in the controller must be selected in accordance with the local network in which CM-
Ethernet is connected.
The static IP used in the controller must be excluded from the pool of addresses which is assigned by
DHCP server, which is in charge of the respective local network.
The local infrastructure must generally allow using devices with manually assigned IP addresses.
There must not be any other device using the same static IP address. This can be tested from a computer
connected to the same network using "ping <required_ip_address>" command issued from the command
line. The IP address is not occupied if there is not any response to the ping command.
Note: The list above contains only basic rules. Other specific restrictions/rules may take place depending on
the local network security policy, technology used, topology etc.
Next way is to switch the CM-Ethernet to automatic IP address mode. Adjust the setpoint IP Address Mode
(page 289) to AUTOMATIC. In that case all IP settings are assigned by DHCP server. Then configure the
DHCP server to assign always the same IP address (i.e. static IP address) to the particular CM-Ethernet
according to it's MAC address.
Internet connection
Public static IP
If public static IP connection is to be used from the Internet, the IP address, which is entered into the client
computer, must be static and public in scope of the Internet.
If CM-Ethernet is connected to Internet via a local ethernet network then in most cases port forwarding
must be created from the public IP address of the network gateway to the local IP address of CM-
Ethernet at the port specified for ComAp protocol. Different port numbers can be used to create multiple
port forwarding rules in the same local network.
AirGate
This connection type is intended for remote connection from InteliConfig,or any other ComAp PC tool over the
Internet in situations, where obtaining fixed public IP address is not possible. Only two remote clients can be
connected at the same time.

This connection type is active if AirGate connection is enabled. Setpoint AirGate Address (page 293) must
contain AirGate server address. It can be entered in text form as well as numeric form. There is a public AirGate
server available at address "airgate.comap.cz".
Once the controller is attached to the Internet and the AirGate server address is properly adjusted then the
controller registers automatically to the server and an identification string AirGate ID is given to a controller,
which is visible at the controller screen.
To connect your PC tool to the controller use the AirGate connection, put the the same AirGate address as in
the controller into the AIRGATE ADDRESS field and use the AirGate ID displayed on the controller.
SMS
Event SMS
The InteliMains 210 controller equipped with the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication module is able to
send Event SMS according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 286)
Note: Firstly setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 281) has to be adjusted.
The following events can be received by mobile phone:

Engine Start/Stop
Manual Start/Stop
Remote Start/Stop
AMF Start/Stop (as Automatic Mains Failure Start/Stop)
Test Start/Stop Gen-set
Mains Fail
Mains Returned
Load on Mains
Load on Gen-set
Test On Load
Message structure:
Genset Name (hh:mm:ss dd.mm.yyyy)
hh:mm:ss Mains Fail
hh:mm:ss AMF Start
hh:mm:ss Load on Genset
hh:mm:ss Mains Returned
hh:mm:ss Load on Mains
hh:mm:ss AMF Stop

Alarm SMS
The InteliMains 210 controller equipped with the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication module is able to
send Alarm SMS according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 287)
Sd Messages (page 287)
BOC Message (page 287)
Note: Firstly setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 281) has to be adjusted.
Message structure:
Gen-set Name
AL=(Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Alarm x)
Note: Asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and exclamation mark means that alarm is active.
SMS commands
To control the gen-set equipped with InteliMains 210 controller and CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS communication
module (or modem) via SMS requests, send an SMS in the structure of:
# xxxx, yyyy, zzzz, etc.
SMS send to the telephone number of the SIM card in your CM-GPRS module (or modem). Where the “#” mark
means the controller access code, “xxxx” means the Command 1, “yyyy” is Command 2, “zzzz” is Command 3,
etc.
Note: Access code is set up via InteliConfig.
IMPORTANT: If wrong controller access code is set, then only help command is working.
start Start the engine in MAN mode.

stop Stop the engine in MAN mode.
fault reset Acknowledging alarms and deactivating the horn output.
gcb close Closing GCB in MAN and TEST mode.
gcb open Opening GCB in MAN and TEST mode.
mcb close Closing MCB in MAN and TEST mode
mcb open Opening MCB in MAN and TEST mode
off Switching to OFF mode.
man Switching to MAN mode.
auto Switching to AUTO mode.
test Switching to TEST mode.
status Get status information from controller unit.
help Get a list of available SMS requests.
Note: Between commands are internal delays adjusted due to system requirements.

Example: When the controller, in AUTO mode, with a controller name of “InteliMains 210-Test”, with the
CM-GPRS module and access code “0” receives the SMS:
0 man, start, gcb close, gcb open, stop, auto
Controller mode will be changed to MANUAL mode. The engine will be started and GCB will close. Then
GCB will open, the engine will stop and it will go into AUTO mode again.
The controller will send back the SMS (controller will respond to SMS after every command has been
finished, not sooner.):
#InteliMains 210-Test: <OK>,<OK>,<OK>, <OK>,<OK>, <OK>
The value <OK> or <ERROR> means if the command has been performed succesfuly or not.
Emails
Event Email
The InteliMains 210 controller equipped with the CM-Ethernet communication module is able to send Event
Email according to the setting of setpoint:
Event Message (page 286)
Note: Firstly setpoints Email Address 1 (page 284) and SMTP Sender Address (page 279) (for CM-GPRS) or
SMTP Sender Address (page 289) (for CM-Ethernet) have to be adjusted.
Note: #Summer Time Mode (page 248) and Time Zone (page 286) have to be adjusted for correct time in emails.
Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss
Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Events
-----------------------------------------------
hh:mm:ss Event 1
hh:mm:ss Event 2
hh:mm:ss Event 3

Alarm Email
The InteliMains 210 controller equipped with the CM-Ethernet communication module is able to send Alarm
Emails according to the setting of setpoints:
Wrn Message (page 287)
Sd Messages (page 287)
BOC Message (page 287)
Note: Firstly setpoints Email Address 1 (page 284) and SMTP Sender Address (page 279) (for CM-GPRS) or
SMTP Sender Address (page 289) (for CM-Ethernet) have to be adjusted.
Note: #Summer Time Mode (page 248) and Time Zone (page 286) have to be adjusted for correct time in emails.
Message structure:
Controller
-----------------------------------------------
Name: XXX
Serial number: XXX
SW branch: XXX
SW version: XXX
Application: XXX
Appl. version: XXX
Date: dd/mm/yyyy
Time: hh:mm:ss
Alarm list
-----------------------------------------------
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
History events
-----------------------------------------------
0 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 1
-1 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 2
-2 dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss.0 Event 3
Note: Asterisk means that alarm is unconfirmed and exclamation mark means that alarm is active.

Web Server
IMPORTANT: The web interface is based on HTTP protocol and is intended to be used only in
private networks. It is not recommended to expose the web interface to the public Internet.
The Web Server is designed for basic monitoring and adjustment of the controller using a web browser. Just put
the controller IP address into the browser to display the main controller web page like http://192.168.1.254. You
will be asked for the controller access code prior to entering the web pages.
IMPORTANT: Do not use the browser navigation buttons as "Back", "Forward" or "Reload". Use
the links and the reload button located in the toolbar instead.
Note: Only two remote clients can be connected to the Web Server at one moment. If you close your web
browser without disconnecting from the CM-Ethernet ("Exit" button at the web pages), the connection will be
blocked for next 5 minutes.
Image 6.7 Web Server main screen

Scada
Click to the SCADA link in the toolbar to display the scada page. The scada page is also the main page which is
displayed by default if you just put the CM-Ethernet address into the browser (after entering the right access
code).
Image 6.8 Web Server - Scada screen

Measurement
Click to the MEASUREMENT link in the toolbar to display the measurement page. Then click to the required
group name in the left box to display values of the group in the right box.
Note: The measurement page is automatically refreshed every 60 seconds (this time cannot be changed).
Image 6.9 Web Server - measurement screen

Setpoints
Click to the SETPOINTS link in the toolbar to display the setpoints page.
Click to the required group name in the left box to display setpoints of the group in the right box.
Click to the required setpoint name or value to change the value. If the respective setpoint is protected by
password, which is indicated by a lock icon by the setpoint name, you have to click on the "Controller
password" icon located in the toolbar and then enter valid password.
Image 6.10 Web Server - Setpoints screen

History
Click to the HISTORY link in the toolbar to display the history page.
Use the control buttons to move within the history file.
Note: The history page is automatically refreshed every 60 seconds. If a new record appears in the controller,
the web page will not show it immediately as e.g. InteliConfig.
Image 6.11 Web Server - History screen

Web Server Adjustment
Click to the "Web Server settings" icon in the toolbar to display the settings page.
Select the controller language the web pages will appear in.
Select the rate of automatic refresh of the scada page.
Image 6.12 Web Server - Adjustment screen
6.2 Connection to 3rd party systems

6.2.1 SNMP 145
6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP 147
6.2.1 SNMP
SNMP is an UDP-based client-server protocol used for providing data and events into a supervisory system
(building management system). The controller plays the role of a „SNMP Agent“ while the supervisory system
plays the role of a „SNMP Manager“.
CM-Ethernet module is required for SNMP function
Supported versions - SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c
The SNMP Agent function is to be enabled by the setpoint SNMP Agent (page 292) in the CM-Ethernet setpoint
group. The setpoints SNMP RD Community String (page 292) and SNMP WR Community String (page 292) in the

same group can be used to customize the „community strings“ for the read and write operations which have
function like „passwords“. All requests sent from the SNMP Manager have to contain community string which
match with the community string adjusted in the controller otherwise the controller refuses the operation.
MIB table
The „MIB table“ (Management Information Base) is a table which gives to the Manager description of all objects
provided by the Agent.
The MIB table is specific for each controller type and configuration
The MIB table is to be exported from the controller configuration using InteliConfig
Controllers with identical firmware and configuration share also identical MIB table, however if the
configuration and/or firmware is not identical the MIB table is different and must be exported separately for
each controller.
The root node of the MIB table of InteliGen controller is enterprises.comapProjekt.il, which is
1.3.6.1.4.1.28634.14. Under this node there are following sub-nodes :
Notifications group (SMI v2 only) contains definitions of all notification-type objects that the Agent may send
to the Manager.
GroupRdFix contains read-only objects that exist in all controller regardless of the firmware version/type and
configuration.
GroupRdCfg contains read-only objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
GroupWrFix contains read-write objects that exist in all controller regardless of the firmware version/type
and configuration.
GroupWrCfg contains read-write objects that depend on the firmware version/type and configuration.
GroupW contains write-only objects.
NotificationData group contains objects that are accessible only as bindings of the notification messages.
SMI version
In InteliConfig the MIB table may be exported in two different formats – SMI v1 and SMI v2. The format which
shall be used for export depends on the SNMP Manager and SMI version that it does support.
Typically, SMI v1 is used for SNMP v1 and vice versa, but it is not a rule and SMI v2 may be also used for
SNMP v1.
SNMP reserved objects
Name OID Access Data type Meaning

Writing: command argument
pfActionArgument groupWrFix.24550 read,write Gauge32
Reading: command return value
pfActionCommand groupW.24551 write Integer32 Command code 1)
pfPassword groupW.24524 write Integer32 Password
1) For list of commands, arguments and description of the procedure of invoking commands see the description
of the MODBUS protocol.

SNMP notifications
Except the request-response communication model, in which the communication is controlled by the Manager,
there are also messages that the Agent sends without any requests. These messages are called „Notifications“
and inform the Manager about significant events occurred in the Agent.
The controller can send notifications to two different SNMP Managers (two different IP addresses). The
addresses are to be adjusted in the CM-Ethernet setpoint group by the setpoints SNMP Traps IP Address 1 (page
292) and SNMP Traps IP Address 2 (page 293). If the Manager address is not adjusted the particular notification
channel is off. The controller will send the notifications in format adjusted by the setpoint SNMP Trap Format.
Each notification (kind of event) is identified by an unique identifier (Trap ID in SNMPv1 or Notification OID
in SNMPv2). This unique identifier gives the specific meaning to the notification message, e.g. Protection 1.
level - Fuel Level - alarm activated.
All possible notifications and their identifiers are listed in the MIB table.
The notification message also contains controller name, serial number and textual description of the event.
Operational events
This events are used for SNMP traps. See the list below:
Start commands of gen-set
Start button
AMF start
Remote start
Stop commands of gen-set
Stop button
AMF stop
Remote stop
Breaker records
Load on gen-set
Load on mains
Others
Test on load
Mains fail
Mains returned
6.2.2 MODBUS-RTU, MODBUS/TCP

MODBUS protocol is used for integration of the controller into a building management system or for remote
monitoring via 3rd party monitoring tools.
MODBUS-RTU can be used on serial interfaces (CM-RS232-485 module is requiredvia on board RS485
connector or via CM-RS232-485 communication module). The MODBUS-RTU server must be activated by
switching the setpoint COM1 Mode (page 263) or COM2 Mode (page 264) into the Modbus position. The
serial speed for MODBUS-RTU communication is to be adjusted by the setpoint COM1 MODBUS
Communication Speed (page 264) or COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed (page 265).

MODBUS/TCP can be used on the ethernet interface (CM-Ethernet module is required). Up to 2 clients can
be connected simultaneously. The MODBUS/TCP server must be activated by the setpoint MODBUS Server
(page 291).
MODBUS, MODBUS/TCP protocol can be used simultaneously with Web connection and direct
ethernet/AirGate connection.
The MODBUS, MODBUS/TCP protocol is enabled alternatively with the SNMP protocol, so both protocols can
not be active simultaneously.
IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoint repeatedly(e.g. power control form a PLC repeated writing of
baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory. which can be
overwritten up to 105 times without risk of damage or data loss, but may become damaged, when
the allowed number of writing cycles is exceeded!
Address space
The object address space is separated into several areas as described in the table below. The actual mapping of
specific controller data objects to specific MODBUS addresses, which depends on configuration, can be
exported into a text file from the appropriate controller archive using InteliConfig. There are several special
registers with fixed meaning (reserved registers) which are listed in a separate table in this chapter.
MODBUS MODICON object

Meaning Access MODBUS function
address type
0000 .. 0999 Binary objects Read only Discrete Inputs Read: 01, 02
1000 .. 2999 Values Read only Input Registers Read: 03, 04
Read: 03, 04
3000 .. 3999 Setpoints Read/Write Holding Registers
Write: 06, 16
Reserved Read/Write, depends on Input Registers Read: 03, 04
4200 .. 7167
registers each specific register Holding Registers Write: 06, 16
Configurable part of the map

The contents of the configurable part of the map is specified in the configuration table. It can be changed by the
customer as well as exported in a human-readable format using the configuration tool.
Discrete inputs
The discrete inputs are read-only objects located in the address range 0-999. The source ComAp objects for
discrete inputs can be:
Single bit of any value of any binary type.
Protection (e.g. 2nd-level protection of the state "xyz"). The input is high if the protection is active regardless
of if it is configured or not.
Input registers
The input registers are read-only numeric values located in the address range 1000-2999. The source ComAp
objects can be:
Any controller value of any data type. The mapping of the particular data type into registers is described in
Mapping data types to registers (page 149).
Holding registers

The holding registers are read-write numeric values located in the address range 3000-3999. The source ComAp
objects can be:
Any controller setpoint of a primitive data type. The mapping of the particular data type into registers is
described in Mapping data types to registers (page 149).
Default contents of the configurable part

The default map of MODBUS objects contain following items. This map expects the PC tool does have the
function allowing the user to modify the map.
Object type Starting object address Controller object

Physical binary inputs CU + configured* modules
Logical binary outputs
Discrete inputs 0000 Protections on binary inputs CU + configured* modules
Protections on analog inputs CU + configured* modules
All Built-in fixed protections
Input registers 1000 All configured* visible values
Holding registers 3000 None
*Present in the default configuration.

IMPORTANT: The default map of a particular firmware branch and application must not change
when a new version of the firmware is created. If new objects are added they must be added to free
positions so, that the previous content is not affected.
IMPORTANT: The default map of a particular firmware branch must not contain different values in
different applications at the same MODBUS address. It means if a ComAp object does not make
sense in some application type the respective MODBUS address must be left unassigned.
Mapping data types to registers

As there are multiple data types in the controller but only one data type in MODBUS (the register, which is 2
byte long), a mapping table is necessary to compose and decompose the MODBUS messages correctly.
Number of
Data type Meaning Data maping
registers
MSB = sign extension
Integer8 1-byte signed integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = 0
Unsigned8 1-byte unsigned integer 1
LSB = value
MSB = value, MSB
Integer16 2-byte signed integer 1
LSB = value, LSB
MSB = value, MSB
LSB = value, LSB
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
Integer32 4-byte signed integer 2 LSB1 = value, byte 2
MSB2 = value, byte 1

Number of
registers
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB1 = value, byte 3 (MSB)
LSB1 = value, byte 2
MSB2 = value, byte 1
LSB2 = value, byte 0 (LSB)
MSB = 0
Binary8 8-bit binary value 1
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB = value, bits 8-15
LSB = value, bits 0-7
MSB1 = value, bits 24-31
LSB1 = value, bits 16-23
MSB2 = value, bits 8-15
LSB2 = value, bits 0-7
MSB = 0
Char 1-byte ASCII character 1
LSB = ASCII value of the character
MSB = 0
StrList Index into a list of strings 1
LSB = index into the list
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
LSB1 = ASCII value of the 2. character
Zero-terminated string of
ShortStr 8 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 15 ASCII characters.
…
MSB1 = ASCII value of the 1. character
Zero-terminated string of
LongStr 16 MSB2 = ASCII value of the 3. character
max 31 ASCII characters.
…

Number of
registers
MSB1 = BCD (dd)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Date Date (dd-mm-yy) 2
MSB2 = BCD (yy)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = BCD (hh)
LSB1 = BCD (mm)
Time Time (hh-mm-ss) 2
MSB2 = BCD (ss)
LSB2 = 0
MSB1 = reserved for future use
LSB1 = reserved for future use
MSB2 = Alarm level *)
LSB2 = Alarm status **)
Alarm An item of the Alarmlist 27 MSB3 = alarm string ***)
LSB3 = alarm string
MSB4 = alarm string
LSB5 = alarm string
…
*) 1 .. level 1 (yellow), 2 .. level 2 (red), 3 .. sensor fail

**) Bit0 – alarm is active, Bit1 – alarm is confirmed
***) String encoding is UTF-8
Error codes (exception codes)

Exception code is returned by the controller (server) if the query sent from the client could not be completed
successfuly.
The controller responds with the error codes in as follows:
01 – Ilegal function is returned if an incompatible type of operation is applied for a specific object, e.g. if
function 03 is applied to a binary object.
02 – illegal address is returned if the client tries to perform an operation with a object address that is not
related to any existing object or that is located inside an object which is composed by multiple addresses
(registers).
04 – device error is returned in all other errorneous situations. More detailed specification of the problem can
be consequently obtained by reading the registers 4205 – 4206.
Reserved registers
There are several registers with specific meaning. These registers are available in all controllers regardless of
the configuration.

Register Number of
Access Data type Meaning
addresses registers
4200 - 4201 2 read/write Time RTC Time in BCD code
4202 - 4203 2 read/write Date RTC Date in BCD code
Index of the language that is used for text
4204 1 read/write Unsigned8 data provided by MODBUS (e.g. alarmlist
messages).
Last application error. To be read after the
4205 - 4206 2 read Unsigned32 device returns the exception code 04. It
contains specific information about the error.
Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code
4010 1 - - Not implemented
4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password
4212 - 4213 2 read Unsigned32 Communication status
4214 1 read Unsigned8 Number of items in the Alarmlist
4215 - 4241 27 read Alarm 1. record in alarm list
List of commands and arguments

"Commands" are used to invoke a specific action in the controller via the communication channel. The list of
available actions is in the table below. The general procedure of writing a command via MODBUS is as follows:
1. (Optional) Write required level of password into the register 44212 (register address 4211). Use function 6. If
the password is required or not depends on configuration of access rules. It can be adjusted/modified by
InteliConfig.

2. Write the command argument into the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208). Use function
16.
3. Write the command code into the register 44210 (register address 4209). Use function 6.
4. (Optional) Read the command return value from the registers 44208-44209 (register addresses 4207-4208).
Use function 3.
5. If the command was executed the return value is as listed in the table. If the command was accepted but
there was an error during execution the return value indicates the reason:
a. 0x00000001 – invalid argument
b. 0x00000002 – command refused (e.g. controller not in MAN, breaker can not be closed in the specific
situation etc.)
Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start *) 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop *) 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE
Fault reset *) 0x01 0x08F70000 0x000008F8
Horn reset *) 0x01 0x04FB0000 0x000004FC
GCB toggle *) 0x02 0x11EE0000 0x000011EF
GCB on 0x02 0x11EF0000 0x000011F0
GCB off 0x02 0x11F00000 0x000011F1
MCB toggle *) 0x02 0x12ED0000 0x000012EE
MCB on 0x02 0x12EE0000 0x000012EF
MCB off 0x02 0x12EF0000 0x000012F0
*) This action is an equivalent of pressing the front panel button

MODBUS examples
Modbus RTU examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Export table of values from InteliConfig
Table: Values
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04
Register(s) Com.Obj. Name Dimension Type Len Dec Min Max Group
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O
Request: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 04 1D 00 01 15 3C
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Number of registers CRC
041Dhex = 1053dec
Response: (Numbers in Hex)

01 03 02 00 F0 B8 00
Length of data Data
Controller address Modbus function CRC
02hex = 2 bytes read 00F0hex = 240dec
We read value 240 from register 01053. From table of modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.
Reading Nominal power
Table: Values
01228 9018 Nominal Power kW Integer 2 0 0 32767 Generator

01 03 04 CC 00 01 45 05
Register address
04CChex = 1228dec

01 03 02 00 C8 B9 D2
Length of data Data
02hex = 2 bytes read 00C8hex = 200dec
Read nominal power is 200 kW.

Reading all binary inputs as modbus register
Table: Values
Binary
01068 8235 Binary#2 2 0 - - Controller I/O
Inputs

01 03 04 2C 00 01 44 F3
Register address
042Chex = 1068dec

01 03 02 00 12 38 49
Length of data Data
02hex = 2 bytes read 0012hex = 00010010bin
Binary inputs is 00010010. It means Binary input 2 and binary input 5 are active.
Note: You can use modbus function 4 insted of 3, rest of data remain same (CRC differs).

Reading binary inputs as coil status.
Table: Binaries
Addresses Source
C.O.# Name of Value Bit Name
Modbus Addr. = Value Bit # Group
State # Name of State Activated by protection(s):
Prot. Addr. = State
00000 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 1 GCB Feedback Controller I/O
00001 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 2 MCB Feedback Controller I/O
00002 Value 8235 Binary Inputs 3 Emergency Stop Controller I/O
We will read state of MCB Feedback binary input.

01 01 00 01 00 01 AC 0A
Register address
0001hex = 0001dec

01 01 01 01 90 48
Length of data Data
01hex = 1 byte read 01hex = active
The readed data is 01, it means this binary input is active.

Note: You can use modbus function 2 insted of 1, rest of data remains same (CRC differs).

Starting the engine
Before starting engine you may need to write password. Depends on your settings in controller.
Table Reserved registers (page 151)
Register addresses Number of registers Access Data type Meaning

Writing:command argument
4207 - 4208 2 read/write Unsigned32
4209 1 write Unsigned16 Command code
Table List of commands and arguments (page 152)
Action Command code Argument Return value

Engine start 0x01 0x01FE0000 0x000001FF
Engine stop 0x01 0x02FD0000 0x000002FE
Request 1/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 10 10 6F 00 03 06
Modbus function Register address
Controller address Number of registers Data length in bytes
10hex = 16dec 106Fhex = 4207dec
Request 2/2: (Numbers in Hex)

01 FE 00 00 00 01 68 0B
Argument Command code CRC
Note: Command and argument may be written as one "packet" (function 16) or you can split it and write
argument (function 16) and after that write command code (function 6).

Password
This password is the same as in InteliConfig or directly in controller.
Table Reserved registers (page 151)
Register addresses Number of registers Access Data type Meaning

4211 1 write Unsigned16 Password
Note: Default password is "0".
In this example the password is "1234".

01 06 10 73 04 D2 7C D1
Register address Password
1073hex = 4211dec 04D2hex = 1234dec
Response for success: (Numbers in Hex)

01 06 10 73 00 00 7C D1
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero. CRC
1073hex = 4211dec
Response for bad password: (Numbers in Hex)

01 86 04 43 A3
Controller Modbus exception 04 – device error
CRC
address for function 6. see Error codes (exception codes) on page 151

Nominal Power – writing
Table: Setpoints
Allowed MODBUS functions: 03, 04, 06, 16
Nominal Basic
03008 8276 kW Unsigned 2 0 1 5000
Power Settings

01 06 0B C0 00 64 8A 39
Register address Data
0BC0hex = 3008dec 0064hex = 100dec

01 06 0B C0 00 00 8B D2
Register address
Controller address Modbus function Allways zero CRC
0BC0hex = 3008dec
Writen setpoint nominal power is 100 kW.

CRC calculation
The check field allows the receiver to check the validity of the message. The check field value is the Cyclical
Redundancy Check (CRC) based on the polynomial x16+x15+x2+1. CRC is counted from all message bytes
preceding the check field.
Online CRC calculator: http://www.lammertbies.nl/comm/info/crc-calculation.html Use CRC-16 (Modbus)
Write LSB first.
For writing nominal power 100 kW the CRC is calculated from this data: 01060BC00064hex

Modbus TCP examples
Reading of Battery voltage
Table: Values
Controller
01053 8213 BatteryVoltage V Integer 2 1 0 400
I/O

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 04 1D 00 01
transaction protocol Length of
Controller Modbus Register address Number of
identifier identifier data bytes
address function 041Dhex = 1053dec registers
(usually 0) (usually 0) following

00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 04 1D 00 01
transaction protocol Length of
Controller Modbus Register address Number of
identifier identifier data bytes
address function 041Dhex = 1053dec registers
(usually 0) (usually 0) following

00 00 00 00 00 05 01 03 02 00 F0
transaction protocol Length of Length of data
Controller Modbus Data
identifier identifier data bytes 02hex = 2 bytes
address function 00F0hex = 240dec
(usually 0) (usually 0) following read
We read value 240 from register 01053. From table of modbus registers we get dimension of read value and
"Dec". Dec=1 means shift one decimal place to the right. So battery voltage is 24.0 V.
6 back to Connection to 3rd party systems

7 Technical data
Power supply Binary inputs
Power supply range 8-36 V DC Number 8, non-isolated
320 mA / 8 V DC Close/Open 0-2 V DC close contact
210 mA / 12 V DC indication 6-36 V DC open contact
Power consumption
120 mA / 24 V DC
Binary outputs
90 mA / 36 V DC
6 low current output, non-isolated
RTC battery Replaceable Low
BO 3-8 = 0,5 A
Power terminal max. 4 A current
switching to positive supply terminal
Fusing w/o BOUT consumption
E-Stop max.12 A Communications
Fusing E-Stop 12 A USB port Non-isolated
Max. Power 250 / 50 kbps, isolated,

9W CAN 1 + CAN 2
Dissipation nominal impedance 120 Ω
D+ 6 back to Table of contents

Max. excitation current 250 mA
Charging fail threshold 80 % of Usupply
Operating conditions
Operating
-20 ˚C to +70 ˚C
temperature
Operating
temperature for Low -40 ˚C to +70 ˚C
Temp. version
Storage temperature -30 ˚C to +80 ˚C
Protection degree
IP 65
(front panel)
Operating humidity 95 % w/o condensation
5-25 Hz, ± 1,6 mm
Vibration
25-100 Hz, a = 4 g
Shocks a = 500 m/s2
Surrounding air temperature rating 70°C

Suitable for pollution degree 2
Voltage measurement
Measurement
3ph-n Gen voltage , 3ph-n Mains
inputs
Measurement
277 V ph-n
range
Max. allowed
350 V ph-n
voltage
Accuracy 1%
Frequency
40-70 Hz (accuracy 0.1 Hz)
range
Input
0,72 MΩ ph-ph , 0,36 MΩ ph-n
impedance
Display
Type Build-in monochromatic 3,2"
Resolution 132 x 64 px

8 Appendix
8.1 Controller objects 163
8.2 Alarms 504
8.3 Modules 538

8.1 Controller objects
8.1.1 Setpoints 164
8.1.2 Values 364
8.1.3 Logical binary inputs 399
8.1.4 Logical binary outputs 434
8.1.5 Logical analog inputs 462
8.1.6 PLC 491

8.1.1 Setpoints
What setpoints are:
Setpoints are analog, binary or special data objects which are used for adjusting the controller to the specific
environment. Setpoints are organized into groups according to their meaning. Setpoints can be adjusted from
the controller front panel, PC, MODBUS, etc.
All setpoints can be protected by a password against unauthorized changes. Password protection can be
assigned to the setpoints during the configuration procedure.
IMPORTANT: Do not write setpoints repeatedly (e.g. power control from a PLC by repeated writing
of baseload setpoint via Modbus). The setpoints are stored in EEPROM memory, which can be
overwritten up to 105 times without risk of damage or data loss, but it may become damaged, when
the allowed number of writing cycles is exceeded.
List of setpoint groups

Group: Process Control 170
Group: Basic settings 175
Group: Communication Settings 181
Group: Bus Right Settings 182
Group: Bus Left Settings 185
Group: Power Management 192
Group: Load Control 202
Group: Voltage/PF Control 203
Group: Synchronisation 204
Group: General Analog Inputs 207
Group: Scheduler 247
Group: Plug-In Modules 262
Group: CM-RS232-485 263
Group: CM-GPRS 265
Group: CM-4G-GPS 274
Group: CM-Ethernet 284
Group: Alternate Configuration 294
Group: PLC 300
For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of setpoints (page 165).

List of setpoints
Process Control Communication Unbalance
#System Load Control Settings Bus Left Voltage

PTM 170 Unbalance Delay 189
Controller Address 181
#System PF Control PTM 170 Bus Left Overfrequency 189
RS485 Mode 181
#System BaseLoad 171 Bus Left Underfrequency 190
RS485 Communication
#System Power Factor 171 Speed 182 Bus Left < > Frequency
Delay 190
Mains Coupling 171 RS485 MODBUS Speed 182
Bus Power Measurement 172
Power Management
Synchronization R To Bus Right Settings
#Power Management
Mains 172 Bus Right Overvoltage 182
Mode 192
Synchronization L To Bus Right Undervoltage 183
#Priority Auto Swap 192
Mains 173 Bus Right < > Voltage
#System Start Delay 193
Synchronization R To L 173 Delay 183
#System Stop Delay 193
Synchronization L To R 173 Bus Right Voltage
Unbalance 183 #Starting Load Reserve 1 193
BTB Opening 174
Bus Right Voltage #Stopping Load Reserve 1 194
Dead Bus Closing 174
Unbalance Delay 183 #Starting Rel Load
Reserve 1 194
Basic settings Bus Right Overfrequency 184
Bus Right Underfrequency 184 #Stopping Rel Load
Controller Name 175
Reserve 1 195
Nominal Bus Import 175 Bus Right < > Frequency
Delay 184 #Starting Load Reserve 2 195
Nominal Current 175
Bus Measurement Error 191 #Stopping Load Reserve 2 196
Bus Import CT Ratio 176
#Starting Rel Load
Connection type 176
Bus Left Settings Reserve 2 196
Nominal Voltage Ph-N 177
#Stopping Rel Load
Overload BOR 185
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 177 Reserve 2 197
Overload Wrn 185
Bus VT Ratio 177 #Min Run Power 197
Overload Delay 185
Nominal Frequency 178 #Next Engine Start Delay 198
Short Circuit BOR 186
Controller mode 178 #Next Engine Stop Delay 198
Short Circuit BOR Delay 186
Power On Mode 179 #Slow Stop Delay 198
IDMT Overcurrent 187
Backlight Timeout 179 #Overload Next Start
Current Unbalance 188
Horn Timeout 179 Protection 199
Current Unbalance Delay 188
Phase Rotation 180 #Overload Next Start
Bus Left Overvoltage 188 Level 199
Battery Undervoltage 180
Bus Left Undervoltage 188 #Overload Next Start
Battery Overvoltage 180 Delay 199
Bus Left < > Voltage
Battery <> Voltage Delay 181 #Run Hours Max
Delay 189
Difference 200
Bus Left Voltage 189
Run Hours Base 200

#Power Band Change Up Analog Protection 3 Sd 211 Analog Protection 11 Wrn 227
Delay 200 Analog Protection 3 Delay 211 Analog Protection 11 Sd 227
#Power Band Change Analog Switch 3 On 212 Analog Protection 11
Down Delay 201 Delay 227
Analog Switch 3 Off 212
Control Group 201 Analog Switch 11 On 228
Analog Protection 4 Wrn 213
Group Link L 201 Analog Switch 11 Off 228
Analog Protection 4 Sd 213
Group Link R 202 Analog Protection 12 Wrn 229
Analog Protection 4 Delay 213
Analog Switch 4 On 214 Analog Protection 12 Sd 229
Load Control
Analog Switch 4 Off 214 Analog Protection 12
Frequency Gain 202 Delay 229
Frequency Int 202 Analog Switch 12 On 230
Angle Gain 203 Analog Switch 12 Off 230
Analog Switch 5 On 216
Voltage/PF Control Analog Protection 13 Sd 231
Voltage Gain 203 Analog Protection 13
Voltage Int 203 Delay 231
Synchronisation Analog Switch 13 Off 232
Synchronization Type 204 Analog Protection 14 Wrn 233
Synchronization Timeout 204 Analog Protection 14 Sd 233
Voltage Window 205 Analog Protection 14
Phase Window 205 Delay 233
Dwell Time 205 Analog Switch 14 On 234
Slip Frequency 205 Analog Switch 14 Off 234
Slip Frequency Window 206 Analog Protection 15 Wrn 235
MGCB Latency 206 Analog Protection 15 Sd 235
MCB Latency 206 Analog Protection 15
Analog Protection 8 Delay 221 Delay 235
General Analog Inputs Analog Switch 8 On 222 Analog Switch 15 On 236
Analog Switch 8 Off 222 Analog Switch 15 Off 236
Analog Protection 9 Wrn 223 Analog Protection 16 Wrn 237
Analog Protection 9 Sd 223 Analog Protection 16 Sd 237
Analog Protection 9 Delay 223 Analog Protection 16
Analog Switch 9 On 224 Delay 237
Analog Switch 9 Off 224 Analog Switch 16 On 238
Analog Protection 10 Wrn 225 Analog Switch 16 Off 238
Analog Protection 10 Sd 225 Analog Protection 17 Wrn 239
Analog Protection 10 Analog Protection 17 Sd 239
Delay 225 Analog Protection 17
Analog Switch 10 On 226 Delay 239
Analog Switch 10 Off 226 Analog Switch 17 On 240

Analog Switch 17 Off 240 Timer 1 Repeat Week In Email Address 2 267
Analog Protection 18 Wrn 241 Month 255 Email Address 3 267
Analog Protection 18 Sd 241 Timer 2 Setup 256 Email Address 4 267
Analog Protection 18 Timer 2 Function 257 Message Language 268
Delay 241 Timer 2 Repetition 257 SMTP User Name 268
Analog Switch 18 On 242 Timer 2 First Occur. Date 258 SMTP User Password 268
Analog Switch 18 Off 242 Timer 2 First Occur. Time 258 SMTP Server Address 269
Analog Protection 19 Wrn 243 Timer 2 Duration 258 SMTP Sender Address 269
Analog Protection 19 Sd 243 Timer 2 Repeated 259 Time Zone 270
Analog Protection 19 Timer 2 Refresh Period 260 Event Message 270
Delay 243 Timer 2 Weekends 261 Wrn Message 270
Analog Switch 19 On 244 Timer 2 Day 261 BOC Message 271
Analog Switch 19 Off 244 Timer 2 Repeat Day 261 Sd Messages 271
Analog Protection 20 Wrn 245 Timer 2 Repeated Day In Telephone Number 1 271
Analog Protection 20 Sd 245 Week 262
Telephone Number 2 272
Analog Protection 20 Timer 2 Repeat Day In
Delay 245 Month 262
Analog Switch 20 On 246 Timer 2 Repeat Week In
DNS IP Address 273
Analog Switch 20 Off 246 Month 262
AirGate Connection 273
Plug-In Modules AirGate Address 273

Scheduler
Slot A 262 ComAp TCP Port 274
Time 247
Slot B 263 Mode 274
Date 247
Required Connection Type275
Time Stamp act 247
Communication APN Name 275
Time Stamp Period 248
Modules APN User Name 275
#Summer Time Mode 248
COM1 Mode 263 APN User Password 276
Timer 1 Setup 249
COM1 Communication Email Address 1 276
Timer 1 Function 250
Speed 263 Email Address 2 276
Timer 1 Repetition 250
COM1 MODBUS Email Address 3 277
Timer 1 First Occur. Date 251
Communication Speed 264 Email Address 4 277
Timer 1 First Occur. Time 251
COM2 Mode 264 Message Language 277
Timer 1 Duration 251
COM2 Communication SMTP User Name 278
Timer 1 Repeated 252 Speed 264
SMTP User Password 278
Timer 1 Refresh Period 253 COM2 MODBUS
SMTP Server Address 278
Timer 1 Weekends 254 Communication Speed 265
SMTP Sender Address 279
Timer 1 Day 254 Mode 265
Time Zone 279
Timer 1 Repeat Day 254 APN Name 265
Event Message 280
Timer 1 Repeated Day In APN User Name 266
Week 255 Wrn Message 280
APN User Password 266
Timer 1 Repeat Day In BOC Message 280
Email Address 1 266
Month 255 Sd Messages 281

Telephone Number 1 281 Alternate PLC Setpoint 21 320
Telephone Number 2 281 Configuration PLC Setpoint 22 321
Telephone Number 3 282 Nominal Frequency 1 294 PLC Setpoint 23 322
Telephone Number 4 282 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 294 PLC Setpoint 24 323
AirGate Connection 283 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 295 PLC Setpoint 25 324
AirGate Address 283 Nominal Current 1 295 PLC Setpoint 26 325
ComAp TCP Port 284 Connection Type 1 295 PLC Setpoint 27 326
Email Address 1 284 Nominal Frequency 2 296 PLC Setpoint 28 327
Email Address 2 285 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 296 PLC Setpoint 29 328
Email Address 3 285 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 297 PLC Setpoint 30 329
Email Address 4 285 Nominal Current 2 297 PLC Setpoint 31 330
Message Language 286 Connection type 2 297 PLC Setpoint 32 331
Time Zone 286 Nominal Frequency 3 298 PLC Setpoint 33 332
Event Message 286 Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 298 PLC Setpoint 34 333
Wrn Message 287 Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 299 PLC Setpoint 35 334
BOC Message 287 Nominal Current 3 299 PLC Setpoint 36 335
Sd Messages 287 Connection type 3 299 PLC Setpoint 37 336
SMTP UserName 288 PLC Setpoint 38 337
SMTP User Password 288 PLC PLC Setpoint 39 338
SMTP Server Address 288 PLC Setpoint 1 300 PLC Setpoint 40 339
SMTP Sender Address 289 PLC Setpoint 2 301 PLC Setpoint 41 340
IP Address Mode 289 PLC Setpoint 3 302 PLC Setpoint 42 341
IP Address 290 PLC Setpoint 4 303 PLC Setpoint 43 342
Subnet Mask 290 PLC Setpoint 5 304 PLC Setpoint 44 343
Gateway IP 290 PLC Setpoint 6 305 PLC Setpoint 45 344
DNS IP Address 1 291 PLC Setpoint 7 306 PLC Setpoint 46 345
DNS IP Address 2 291 PLC Setpoint 8 307 PLC Setpoint 47 346
MODBUS Server 291 PLC Setpoint 9 308 PLC Setpoint 48 347
SNMP Agent 292 PLC Setpoint 10 309 PLC Setpoint 49 348
SNMP RD Community PLC Setpoint 11 310 PLC Setpoint 50 349
String 292 PLC Setpoint 51 350
PLC Setpoint 12 311
SNMP WR Community PLC Setpoint 52 351
PLC Setpoint 13 312
String 292
PLC Setpoint 14 313 PLC Setpoint 53 352
SNMP Traps IP Address 1292
AirGate Connection 293
AirGate Address 293
ComAp TCP Port 294

PLC Setpoint 60 359

PLC Setpoint 61 360
PLC Setpoint 62 361
PLC Setpoint 63 362
PLC Setpoint 64 363

Group: Process Control
Subgroup: Load Control
#System Load Control PTM

Setpoint group Process Control Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] Baseload / Loadsharing [-]
Default value Baseload Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Comm object 8774 Related applications MCB, MGCB, BTB
Description
Load control mode in parallel to mains operation of the whole group of gen-sets.
The total power of the group is controlled to constant level given by the setpoint
#System BaseLoad (page 171). Each loaded gen-set takes equal part (relative to their
nominal power) from this requested value. The load is regulated locally in each
Baseload
controller by Load control regulation loop, load-sharing is not active. The setpoint
#System BaseLoad (page 171) is also used for determining which gen-sets have to run
or not.
Gen-sets load is controlled by IM210 controller to share the total load (given by the
setpoint #System BaseLoad (page 171)) with other loaded gen-sets in such a way, that
Loadsharing
all loaded gen-sets will be loaded at the same level (relative to gen-set nominal power).
Load-sharing regulation loop is active.
Note: The Loadsharing mode shall be used in case a IM210 controller is present in the system. In
systems without IM210 the setpoint must be in the Baseload position.
Note: The power factor (PF) is regulated to constant level given by the setpoint #System PF Control PTM
(page 170) in parallel to mains operation and does not depend on active load control mode.
6 back to List of setpoints
#System PF Control PTM

Range [units] Base PF / Var Sharing [-]
Default value Base PF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Power factor control mode in parallel to mains operation of the whole group of gen-sets.
Gensets PF is controlled by their PF control loops to provide constant power factor

Base PF adjusted by setpoint #System Power Factor (page 171). InteliMains doesn't play active
role in PF control in parallel to mains operation.
Var Sharing Gensets PF is controlled by InteliMains through the VAr sharing line.

#System BaseLoad
Range [units] 0 .. 32 000 [kW]
Default value 1 000 kW Alternative config NO
Step 1 kW
Description
Required total load of the gen-set group in parallel to mains operation in baseload mode (setpoint #System
Load Control PTM (page 170) = Baseload).
#System Power Factor

Range [units] 0,60 .. 1,20 [-]
Default value 1,00 [-] Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 [-]
Description
Required gen-set power factor when the group of gen-sets is running parallel to the mains. The PF is
regulated locally in each controller by PF control regulation loop, VARsharing is not active.
Subgroup: Mains coupling
Mains Coupling
Process
Setpoint group Related FW 2.0.0
Control
Range [units] Enabled / Disabled [-]
Default value Disabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint adjusts behavior of BTB in systems where mains is present on both sides of bus.
Enable - BTB can be closed when there is mains on both sides
Disable - BTB cant be closed, when there is mains on both sides
Note: Passive phase/voltage check is performed before mains coupling.

Subgroup: Transferred Bus Power Measurement
Bus Power Measurement

Range [units] None/Mains CT/Analog Input [-]
Default value Mains CT Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Defines source value of the Bus Left Import (page 367) measurement.
None The Transferred Bus Power is not measured.

Bus CT The Bus Left Import (page 367) value is measured via Bus CTs.
The Bus Left Import (page 367) value is measured via analog input, accordingly LAI:
Analog Input
BUS IMPORT MEASUREMENT (PAGE 490).
Subgroup: BTB Control
Synchronization R To Mains
Process
Control
Step [-]
Comm object 16047 Related applications BTB
Description
Setpoint for adjustment of the direction of synchronization. This setpoint has to be Enable for situations
where the Mains is on the left side and gen-sets are on the right side.
Note: In case the Mains is on the right side, the controller will not try to synchronize.

Synchronization L To Mains
Process
Control
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint for adjustment of the direction of synchronization. This setpoint has to be Enable for situations
where the Mains is on the right side and gen-sets are on the left side.
Note: In case the Mains is on the left side, the controller will not try to synchronize.
Process
Control
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint for setting the direction of synchronization. This setpoint has to be set to Enable if on both sides are
gen-sets. In case the setpoint is set to enable and even on one side is mains, controller recognizes it and
automatically adjust the direction of synchronization.
Synchronization L To R
Process
Control
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint for setting the direction of synchronization. This setpoint has to be set to Enable if on both sides are
gen-sets. In case the setpoint is set to enable and even on one side is mains, controller recognizes it and
automatically adjust the direction of synchronization.

BTB Opening
Process
Control
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint adjusts if the BTB should be opened (in AUTO mode) when both sides are dead.
Enable - BTB is opened when both sides are dead
Disable - BTB stays closed even both sides of the bus are dead
Dead Bus Closing

Process
Control
Range [units] Disabled / LeftToRight / RightToLeft/ Both [-]
Step [-]
Description
Setpoint adjusts behavior of BTB when there is dead bus.
Closing to dead bus is disabled. Controller in AUTO mode does not close breaker
Disable
unless there is voltage on both sides
Closing to dead bus is enabled only if there is healthy voltage on busL. Controller in
LeftToRight AUTO mode does not close breaker unless there is not healthy voltage on busL or is
healthy votlage on both sides
Closing to dead bus is enabled only if there is healthy voltage on busR. Controller in
RightToLeft AUTO mode does not close breaker unless there is not healthy voltage on busR or
is healthy voltage on both sides
Both BTB closes if one of the buses is healthy

Group: Basic settings
Subgroup: Name
Controller Name
Setpoint group Basic settings Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 15 characters [-]
Default value InteliGen Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
User defined name, used for the controller identification at remote phone or mobile connection. Gen-Set
Name is maximally 15 characters long and can be entered using InteliConfig or from controller’s
configuration menu.
Note: If the Gen-Set Name is "TurboRunHours", the running hours will be counted faster - 1 minute in
real will represent 1 hour.
Subgroup: Power settings
Nominal Bus Import

Default value 200 kW Alternative config Yes
Step 1 kW
Description
Nominal power imported from the Bus. Bus Overload BOR protection is based on this setpoint.
Subgroup: Current settings
Nominal Current
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Default value 350 A Alternative config YES
Step 1A
Description
It is current limit for current protections and means maximal continuous current.
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Current 1 (page 295),
Nominal Current 2 (page 297) and Nominal Current 3 (page 299).

Bus Import CT Ratio
Range [units] 1 .. 2 000 [A/5A]
Default value 500 A/5A Alternative config NO
Step 1 A/5A
Description
Bus current transformers ratio.
Note: Generator currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is below 1% of CT
range.
Subgroup: Voltage settings
Connection type
Range [units] Mono Phase / SplitPhase / 3Ph3Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph4Wire [-]
Default value 3Ph4Wire Alternative config YES
Step [-]
Comm object 11628 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Description
Connection type:
Mono Phase Single phase voltage measurement L1-N

1x CT (Current Transformer)
Split Phase Double Delta connection
Split Phase
Two phase voltage measurement L1,L2 with 180° phase shift
3Ph3Wire Ungrounded Delta connection
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye
Corner-Grounded Delta
Split Phase Delta
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3 with 120° phase shift
No neutral is available 3x CT (Current Transformer)
High Leg D High Leg Delta connection
Three phase voltage measurement L1,L2,L3
3Ph4Wire Grounded Star (Grounded Wye) connection – 3PY

Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Connection Type 1 (page 295),
Connection type 2 (page 297) and Connection type 3 (page 299).
Nominal Voltage Ph-N

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Default value 231 V Alternative config YES
Step 1V
Description
Nominal voltage (phase to neutral).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-N 1 (page
294), Nominal Voltage Ph-N 2 (page 296) and Nominal Voltage Ph-N 3 (page 298).
Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph

Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to phase).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1 (page
295), Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 2 (page 297) and Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 3 (page 299).
Bus VT Ratio
Range [units] 0,1 .. 500,0 [V/V]
Default value 1,0 V/V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V/V
Description
Bus voltage potential transformers ratio. If no PTs are used, adjust the setpoint to 1.

Subgroup: Frequency settings
Nominal Frequency
Range [units] 45 .. 65 [Hz]
Default value 50 Hz Alternative config YES
Step 1 Hz
Description
Nominal system frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz).
Note: To lock this setpoint against editing you also have to lock setpoint Nominal Frequency 1 (page
294), Nominal Frequency 2 (page 296) and Nominal Frequency 3 (page 298).
Subgroup: Controller settings
Controller mode
Range [units] OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST [-]
Default value OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint can be used for changing the Controller mode remotely, e.g. via MODBUS. Use the mode
selector on the main screen for changing the mode from the front panel. Use mode selector in the control
window for changing the mode from InteliConfig.

Power On Mode
Range [units] Previous / OFF [-]
Default value Previous Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts controller mode after power on of controller.
Previous When controller is power on, than is switched into last mode before power off.
OFF When controller is power on, than is switched into OFF mode.
Note: Remote modes - In case that some LBI remote mode is activated during power on of controller
than this LBI has higher priority than this setpoint - controller mode is forced into mode selected via LBI.
After deactivation of LBI, controller is switched into value selected via setpoint Power On Mode
Backlight Timeout
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 255 [min]
Step 1 min
Description
The display backlight is switched off when this timer exceed. When setpoint is adjusted to disabled then the
display will be backlighted all the time.
Horn Timeout
Range [units] Disabled / 1 .. 599 [s]
Default value 10 s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Description
Setting of horn behavior.
Disabled Disabling the Horn sounding function
Timeout for HORN (PAGE 459) binary output. The HORN (PAGE 459) output is opened when
1 .. 599 [s]
this timeout elapsed.
Note: Horn timeout starts again from the beginning if a new alarm appears before previous Horn timeout
has elapsed.

Subgroup: Phase rotation
Phase Rotation
Range [units] Clockwise / CounterCCW [-]
Default value Clockwise Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjust the phase sequence of voltage terminals.
Subgroup: Battery Protections
Battery Undervoltage
Setpoint group Engine settings Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] 8,0 V .. Battery Overvoltage (page 180) [V]
Default value 18,0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V
Description
Warning threshold for low battery voltage.
Battery Overvoltage
Range [units] Battery Undervoltage (page 180) .. 40,0 [V]
Default value 36,0 V Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 V
Description
Warning threshold for high battery voltage.

Battery <> Voltage Delay
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [s]
Default value 5s Alternative config NO
Step 1s
Description
Delay for Battery Undervoltage (page 180) and Battery Overvoltage (page 180) protection.
Group: Communication Settings

Subgroup: Controller CAN Address
Controller Address
Communication
Settings
Range [units] 1 .. 32 [-]
Default value 1 Alternative config NO
Step 1
Description
Controller identification number. It is possible to set controller address different from the default value (1) so
that more controllers can be interconnected (via RS485) and accessed e.g. from MODBUS terminal.
Note: When opening connection to the controller it's address has to correspond with the setting in PC
tool.
Subgroup: RS485 Settings
RS485 Mode
Communication
Settings
Range [units] Direct / MODBUS [-]
Default value Direct Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Communication protocol switch for on-board RS485.
Direct InteliConfig communication protocol via serial cable.

MODBUS MODBUS protocol.

RS485 Communication Speed
Communication
Settings
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Default value 57600 bps Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
If the direct mode is selected on on-board RS485, the direct communication speed of controller part of line
can be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.
RS485 MODBUS Speed

Communication
Settings
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Step [-]
Description
If the MODBUS mode is selected on COM1 channel, the MODBUS communication speed can be adjusted
here.
Group: Bus Right Settings

Subgroup: Bus Right Voltage Limits
Bus Right Overvoltage

Setpoint group Bus Right Settings Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] Bus Right Undervoltage (page 183) .. 150 [%]
Default value 110 % Alternative config NO
Step 1 % of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 177)
Description
Threshold for Bus Right overvoltage. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.

Bus Right Undervoltage
Range [units] 50 .. Bus Right Overvoltage (page 182) [%]
Default value 60 % Alternative config YES
Description
Threshold for Bus Right undervoltage. All three phases are checked. Minimum voltage out of three phases is
used.
Bus Right < > Voltage Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Default value 2,0 s Alternative config YES
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Bus Right Undervoltage (page 183) and Bus Right Overvoltage (page 182) protection.
Bus Right Voltage Unbalance

Range [units] 1 .. 150 [%] of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 177)
Description
Threshold for Bus Right voltage unbalance.
Bus Right Voltage Unbalance Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 60,0 [s]
Default value 2,0 s Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Bus Right Voltage Unbalance (page 183) protection.

Subgroup: Bus Right Frequency Limits
Bus Right Overfrequency

Range [units] Bus Right Underfrequency (page 184) .. 150 [%]
Default value 102,0 % Alternative config NO
Step 1,0 % of Nominal Frequency (page 178)
Description
Threshold for Bus Right overfrequency.
Bus Right Underfrequency

Range [units] 50 .. Bus Right Overfrequency (page 184) [%]
Description
Threshold for Bus Right underfrequency.
Bus Right < > Frequency Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 60,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Bus Right Underfrequency (page 184) and Bus Right Overfrequency (page 184) protection.

Group: Bus Left Settings
Subgroup: Overload Protection
Overload BOR
Setpoint group Bus Left Settings Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 200 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Bus Import (page 175)
Description
Threshold level for Bus Left overload (in % of Nominal power) protection. Protection is BOR.
Overload Wrn
Range [units] 0 .. 200 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Bus Import (page 175)
Description
Threshold level for Bus Left overload (in % of Nominal power) protection. This is only warning.
Overload Delay
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Overload BOR (page 185) and Overload Wrn (page 185) protection.

Subgroup: Current Protection
Short Circuit BOR

Range [units] 100 .. 500 [%]
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 175)
Description
BOR occurs when current reaches this preset threshold.
Short Circuit BOR Delay

Range [units] 0,00 .. 10,00 [s]
Step 0,01 s
Description
Delay for Short Circuit BOR (page 186) protection.

IDMT Overcurrent
Range [units] 1,0 .. 180,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
IDMT curve shape selection. IDMT Overcurrent Delay is a reaction time of IDMT protection for 200%
overcurrent Igen =2*Nominal Current (page 175)
IDMT is “very inverse” over current protection. Reaction time is not constant but depends on over current
level according to the following formula:
Overcurrent IDMT Delay * Nominal Current
Reaction time =
I gen− Nominal Current
Note: Reaction time is limited to 3600 s = 60 minutes. IDMT protection is not active for Reaction time
values longer than 60 minutes.
Igen is maximal value of all measured phases of Bus Left current.

Table 8.1 EXAMPLE of Reaction time for different over current levels
Overcurrent
Overcurrent IDMT Delay
≤ 100 % 101 % 110 %
Reaction time 0,2 s No action 20 s 2s
2s No action 200 s 20 s
20 s No action 2000 s 200 s
Image 8.1 IDMT Overcurrent Delay

Current Unbalance
Range [units] 1 .. 200 [%] of Nominal Current (page 175)
Step 1 % of Nominal Current (page 175)
Description
Threshold for Bus Left current asymmetry (unbalance).
Current Unbalance Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Current Unbalance (page 188) protection.
Subgroup: Bus Left Voltage Limits
Bus Left Overvoltage

Range [units] Bus Left Undervoltage (page 188) .. 150 [%]
Description
Threshold for Bus Left overvoltage. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used.
Bus Left Undervoltage

Range [units] 50 .. Bus Left Overvoltage (page 188) [%]
Default value 60 % Alternative config YES
Description
Threshold for Bus Left undervoltage. All three phases are checked. Minimum voltage out of three phases is
used.

Bus Left < > Voltage Delay
Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Bus Left Undervoltage (page 188) and Bus Left Overvoltage (page 188) protection.
Bus Left Voltage Unbalance

Range [units] 1 .. 150 [%] of Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph (page 177)
Description
Threshold for Bus Left voltage unbalance.
Bus Left Voltage Unbalance Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 60,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Bus Left Voltage Unbalance (page 189) protection.
Subgroup: Bus Left Frequency Limits
Bus Left Overfrequency

Range [units] Bus Left Underfrequency (page 190) .. 150 [%]
Description
Threshold for Bus Left overfrequency.

Bus Left Underfrequency
Range [units] 50 .. Bus Left Overfrequency (page 189) [%]
Description
Threshold for Bus Left underfrequency.
Bus Left < > Frequency Delay

Range [units] 0,0 .. 600,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
Delay for Bus Left Underfrequency (page 190) and Bus Left Overfrequency (page 189) protection.

Subgroup: Bus Measurement Error
Bus Measurement Error

Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED
Default value DISABLED Alternative config NO
Step -
Description
Bus measure error is detected when the voltage on controller’s bus terminals is out of limits for 20 seconds
under these conditions:
MCB application
MCB (feedback)was closed in AUTO mode.
Any GCB in power management group (on CAN bus) was closed. The alarm is activated after 20 s,
however the MCB closing is blocked immediately for safety reasons.
MGCB application
MCB and MGCB (feedbacks) were closed in AUTO mode.
however the MGCB closing is blocked immediately from safety reasons.
BTB application
BTB feedback was closed in AUTO mode
however the BTB closing is blocked immediately for safety reasons. The GCBs at "left" and "right"
sides are evaluated independently

Group: Power Management
Subgroup: Power Management Control
#Power Management Mode

Setpoint group Power Management Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] ABS [kW] / REL [%]
Default value ABS Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to select the Power management (page 78) mode.
The power management is based on actual active power and gen-set nominal power.
ABS [kW]
The reserves are calculated and adjusted in kW.
The power management is based on the relative load, i.e. ratio active power to nominal
REL [%]
power. The reserves are calculated and adjusted in %.
#Priority Auto Swap

Range [units] Disabled / Run Hours Equal / Efficient [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts priority auto swapping.
Disabled Optimalization is disabled.

This method changes the priorities (not the setpoints itself) to equalize running
Run Hours Equal hours of the gen-sets or to keep constant difference of running hours by the
controller (adjusted via setpoint #Run Hours Max Difference (page 200)).
This method changes the priorities (not the setpoints itself) to optimize which gen-
sets are running according to their capacities and actual load demand.
IMPORTANT: This priority swapping function is only for absolute
mode of power management (#Power Management Mode (page 192) =
Efficient ABS).
Optimal power band (number of running gen-sets) is calculated based on the

nominal power of each gen-set, their Run Hours and requested Load reserve. For
gen-sets with the same nominal power also run hour equalization is being
performed.

#System Start Delay
Range [units] 0 .. 600 [-]
Step 1
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay of the system activation after the binary input REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE
433) has been activated.
#System Stop Delay

Range [units] 0 .. 600 [-]
Step 1
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay of the system deactivation after the binary input REMOTE START /STOP (PAGE
433) has been deactivated.
Subgroup: Load Reserve Set 1
#Starting Load Reserve 1

Range [units] 0 .. #Stopping Load Reserve 1 (page 194) [kW]
Default value 60 kW Alternative config NO
Step 1 kW
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start of next gen-set in absolute mode. i.e. #Power
Management Mode (page 192) = ABS.
IMPORTANT: Logical binary input LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 430) has to be deactivated,
otherwise setpoints of Load Reserve Set 2 are used.
Note: See Power management (page 78) chapter for more information.

#Stopping Load Reserve 1
Range [units] #Starting Load Reserve 1 (page 193) .. 32 000 [kW]
Step 1 kW
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop of next gen-set in absolute mode. i.e. #Power
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 1

Range [units] 0 .. #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 195) [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start of next gen-set in relative mode. i.e. #Power
Management Mode (page 192) = REL.

#Stopping Rel Load Reserve 1
Range [units] #Starting Rel Load Reserve 1 (page 194) .. 110 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop of next gen-set in relative mode. i.e. #Power
Subgroup: Load Reserve Set 2
#Starting Load Reserve 2

Range [units] 0 .. #Stopping Load Reserve 2 (page 196) [kW]
Step 1 kW
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start of next gen-set in absolute mode. i.e. #Power
IMPORTANT: Logical binary input LOAD RES 2 ACTIVE (PAGE 430) has to be activated,

#Stopping Load Reserve 2
Range [units] #Starting Load Reserve 2 (page 195) .. 32 000 [kW]
Step 1 kW
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop of next gen-set in absolute mode. i.e. #Power
#Starting Rel Load Reserve 2

Range [units] 0 .. #Stopping Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 197) [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for start of next gen-set in relative mode. i.e. #Power

#Stopping Rel Load Reserve 2
Range [units] #Starting Rel Load Reserve 2 (page 196) .. 110 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the load reserve for stop of next gen-set in relative mode. i.e. #Power
Subgroup: Minimal Running Power
#Min Run Power

Default value 210 kw Alternative config NO
Step 1 kW
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust certain minimum value of the sum of nominal power of all running gen-sets. If
the function is active (by logical binary input Min Run Power Active (page 430)), then the gen-sets would not
be stopped, although the reserve for stop is fulfilled, if the total remaining nominal power drops below this
minimal value.
Note: Logical binary input Min Run Power Active (page 430)) needs to be activated on all gen-sets in the
same time.

Subgroup: Start/Stop Timing
#Next Engine Start Delay

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay for starting the next gen-set after the reserve has dropped below the reserve
for start.
#Next Engine Stop Delay

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjusts the delay for stopping the gen-set after the reserve has risen above the reserve for
stop.
#Slow Stop Delay

Step 1s
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust how long the particular gen-set will suppress it's own Slow stop alarm to give
chance to another gen-set to start and replace the defective one.
Note: If there isn't any available gen-set to start, the alarm is not suppressed.
Note: This function is not supported in BTB application.

Subgroup: Over Load Next Start Protection
#Overload Next Start Protection

Default value Enabled Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is intended for activation of the protection against the overloading of the system due to rapid
change of the load. It makes the next gen-set (in priority order) to start when the load excises the value given
by the setpoint #Overload Next Start Level (page 199) right after the delay #Overload Next Start Delay (page
199).
#Overload Next Start Level

Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
Threshold level for #Overload Next Start Protection (page 199).
#Overload Next Start Delay

Step 1s
Comm object 8493 Related applications MINT
Description
Delay for #Overload Next Start Protection (page 199).

Subgroup: Run Hours Equalization
#Run Hours Max Difference

Range [units] 0 .. 65 000 [h]
Default value 100 h Alternative config NO
Step 1h
Description
This setpoint adjusts the "dead-band" for the running hours equalization function (#Priority Auto Swap (page
192) = Run Hours Equal). The priorities are swapped not until the relative engine hours difference is higher
than this dead-band.
Run Hours Base

Range [units] 0,0 .. 200000,0 [h]
Default value 0,0 h Alternative config NO
Step 0,1 h
Comm object 10600 Related applications MINT
Description
Running hours base corrects actual Running hours differences between particular gen-sets.
Example:
Gen-set 1 actual Running hours = 1000 h.
Gen-set 2 actual Running hours = 2000 h.
Adjust this setpoint for Gen-set 1 = 1000 h and for Gen-set 2 = 2000 h to be on the same base for
Running Hours Equalization.
Subgroup: Efficient Mode
#Power Band Change Up Delay

Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step [s]
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting the delay of changing the power band if the load demand rose above the
upper limit of the current power band. Setpoint is taken into account only if #Priority Auto Swap (page 192) =
Efficient.

#Power Band Change Down Delay
Range [units] 0 .. 3 600 [s]
Step [s]
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting the delay of changing the power band if the load demand drops below the
lower limit of the current power band. Setpoint is taken into account only if #Priority Auto Swap (page 192) =
Efficient.
Subgroup: Group Settings
Control Group
Range [units] 1,2 .. 32 [-]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint selects the control group (to get more information on this function please refer to the chapter
Control groups (page 95) to which the particular gen-set belongs. If there aren't logical groups at the site,
adjust the setpoint to 1.
Group Link L
Range [units] 1,2 .. 32 [-]
Step 1s
Description
If the input GROUP LINK (PAGE 429) of this particular controller is used to provide the "group link" information
for two Control groups (to get more information refer to the chapter Control groups (page 95)), then this
setpoint is used to select which group is located at the left side of the group link breaker (bus tie breaker). If
this particular controller is not used for the group link function, adjust this setpoint to 1.

Group Link R
Range [units] 1,2 .. 32 [-]
Step 1s
Description
If the input GROUP LINK (PAGE 429) of this particular controller is used to provide the "group link" information
for two Control groups (to get more information refer to the chapter Control groups (page 95)), then this
setpoint is used to select which group is located at the right side of the group link breaker (bus tie breaker). If
this particular controller is not used for the group link function, adjust this setpoint to 1.
Group: Load Control

Subgroup: Regulation Loops
Frequency Gain
Setpoint group Load Control Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the frequency control PI loop.
Note: See the chapter Regulation loops (page 100) for more information.
Frequency Int
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative integration factor (I-factor) of the frequency control PI loop.

Angle Gain
Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint is used for adjusting of the gain factor (P-factor) of the phase angle P-control loop.
Note: During synchronization, first the frequency loop is started to match the generator frequency with
the mains or bus and after that the phase angle loop is started to match the phase angle.
Group: Voltage/PF Control

Subgroup: Regulation Loops
Voltage Gain
Setpoint group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] 0,0 .. 200,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint adjusts the gain factor (P-factor) of the voltage control PI loop.
Voltage Int
Setpoint group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] 0 .. 100 [%]
Step 1%
Description
This setpoint adjusts the relative integration factor (I-factor) of the voltage control PI loop.

Group: Synchronisation
Synchronization Type
Setpoint group Synchronisation Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] Phase Match / Slip Synchro [-]
Default value Phase Match Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts the type of synchronization.
This type of synchronization is based on voltage and phase shift match. Limits are
adjusted via setpoints Voltage Window (page 205) and Phase Window (page 205).
Phase Match
When voltage and phase shift are match, Dwell Time (page 205) starts countdown.
After that the command for breaker closing is activated.
This type of synchronization regulates the value of frequency to the value Mains/Bus
frequency + Slip Frequency (page 205) (Mains frequency in SPtM, Bus frequency in
MINT application). When this frequency is reached, Dwell Time (page 205) starts
Slip Synchro countdown. After that the command for breaker closing is activated. The closing
breaker command is issued in advance due to latency of breakers (adjusted via
setpoints MGCB Latency (page 206) and MCB Latency (page 206)).
Note: Condition of Voltage Window (page 205) has to be also fulfilled.
Synchronization Timeout
Range [units] OFF / 1 .. 1800 [s]
Step 1s
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximum duration of synchronizing.
Note: If this setpoint is adjusted to OFF then automatic restart of synchronization occurs every 180s.
This method helps to synchronize successfully even in difficult conditions.

Voltage Window
Range [units] 0,0 .. 100,0 [%]
Step 0,1 %
Description
This setpoint adjusts maximum difference between Bus Right and Bus Left voltage in respective phases for
synchronization.
Phase Window
Range [units] 0 .. 90 [°]
Default value 10 ° Alternative config NO
Step 1°
Description
This setpoint adjusts the maximum absolute value of difference between actual phase angle between the
Bus Right and Bus Left voltages for synchronization.
Dwell Time
Range [units] 0,0 .. 25,0 [s]
Step 0,1 s
Description
The period of time that the phase angle difference must be within Phase Window (page 205) and voltage
difference within Voltage Window (page 205) before the breaker is closed.
Slip Frequency
Range [units] -0,50 .. 0,50 [Hz]
Default value -0,25 Hz Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 Hz
Description
Slip frequency for slip synchronization (Synchronization Type (page 204) = Slip Synchro).

Slip Frequency Window
Range [units] 0,01 .. 0,50 [Hz]
Default value 0,15 Hz Alternative config NO
Step 0,01 Hz
Description
Window of slip frequency for slip synchronization (Synchronization Type (page 204) = Slip Synchro).
MGCB Latency
Range [units] 20 .. 1 000 [ms]
Default value 80 ms Alternative config NO
Step 1 ms
Description
Latency of MGCB.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is enable, when Synchronization Type (page 204) has Split Synchro
value
MCB Latency
Range [units] 20 .. 1 000 [ms]
Default value 80 ms Alternative config NO
Step 1 ms
Description
Latency of MCB.
IMPORTANT: This setpoint is enable, when Synchronization Type (page 204) has Split Synchro
value

Group: General Analog Inputs
General Analog Input 1
Analog Protection 1 Wrn

Setpoint group General Analog Inputs Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] the range is defined by analog sensor curve
the value is defined by
Default value Alternative config NO
analog sensor curve
Step the step is defined by analog sensor curve
Description
Warning or history threshold level for AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 464).
Note: These setpoints are used only if LAI AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 464) is adjusted to required protection
type. Otherwise these setpoints are useless.
Analog Protection 1 Sd
analog sensor curve
Description
Shutdown or BOC threshold level for AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 464).
Analog Protection 1 Delay

Step 1s
Description
Delay for AIN PROT 01 (PAGE 464).

Analog Switch 1 On
analog sensor curve
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 439) on. The value is measured from
AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 484) analog input.
Image 8.2 General analog input 1 switch
Analog Switch 1 Off

analog sensor curve
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 439) off. The value is measured from


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 2 On
analog sensor curve
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 484) on. The value is measured from
Analog Switch 2 Off

analog sensor curve
Description
Threshold level for switching the binary output AIN SWITCH 02 (PAGE 484) off. The value is measured from


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 3 On
analog sensor curve
Description
Analog Switch 3 Off

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 4 On
analog sensor curve
Description
Analog Switch 4 Off

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 5 On
analog sensor curve
Description
Analog Switch 5 Off

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 6 On
analog sensor curve
Description
Analog Switch 6 Off

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 7 On
analog sensor curve
Description
Analog Switch 7 Off

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 8 On
analog sensor curve
Description
Analog Switch 8 Off

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 9 On
analog sensor curve
Description
Analog Switch 9 Off

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 10 On
analog sensor curve
Description
Analog Switch 10 Off

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 11 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 12 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 13 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 14 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 15 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 16 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 17 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 18 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 19 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description


analog sensor curve
Description
analog sensor curve
Description

Step 1s
Description

Analog Switch 20 On
analog sensor curve
Description

analog sensor curve
Description

Group: Scheduler
Subgroup: Time & Date
Time
Setpoint group Scheduler Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] HH:MM:SS [-]
Default value 0:0:0 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Real time clock adjustment.
Date
Range [units] DD/MM/YYYY [-]
Default value 1.1.2015 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Actual date adjustment.
Time Stamp act

Range [units] Disabled / Condition / Always [-]
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint selects the Time stamp function mode.
Disabled The function is disabled.

While the binary input TIME STAMP ACT (PAGE 433) is active the Time stamps
Condition records are recorded into the history log with period adjusted by setpoint Time Stamp
Period (page 248).
The Time stamps records are recorded into the history log with period adjusted by
Always setpoint Time Stamp Period (page 248) all the time while the controler is switched
on.

Time Stamp Period
Range [units] 0 .. 240 [min]
Default value 60 min Alternative config NO
Step 1 min
Description
Time interval for periodic history records.
Note: History record is made only when engine is running.
#Summer Time Mode

Range [units] Disabled / Winter / Summer / Winter - S / Summer - S [-]
Step [-]
Description
Behavior of switching between winter and summer time.
Disable Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is disabled.

Winter Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is enabled and it is set to winter
(Summer) (summer) season.
Winter - S
Modification for southern hemisphere.
(Summer - S)

Subgroup: Timer 1
Timer 1 Setup
Range [units] [-]
Default value [-] Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description

Timer 1 Function
Range [units] Disable / No Func / TEST / Test OnLd / MFail Blk / Mode OFF [-]
Default value Disable Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
It is possible to choose from following timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 1 (PAGE 458) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require controller
running in AUTO mode.
IMPORTANT: Binary output is activated always when timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.
Timer 1 has the highest priority. Timer 8 has the lowest priority. So if Timer 1 is configured for OFF mode and
Timer 8 is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in OFF mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already running.
Disable The Timer is disabled.

No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
TEST When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
binary input Remote TEST.
TEST OnLd When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Remote TEST On Load binary input.
MFail Blk When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Mains Fail Block binary input.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Remote OFF binary input.
Timer 1 Repetition
Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 1 Function (page 250).
Off Timer 1 Function (page 250) will not be activated.

Once Timer 1 Function (page 250) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 1 Function (page 250) will be repeatedly activated.

Timer 1 First Occur. Date
Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Date of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 250).
Timer 1 First Occur. Time

Range [units] [HH:MM]
Default value 00:00 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 250).
Timer 1 Duration
Step [-]
Description
Timer 1 Function (page 250) duration time.

Timer 1 Repeated
Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 1 Function (page 250).
Daily Timer 1 Function (page 250) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 1 Function (page 250) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 1 Function (page 250) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen days of
chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 1 Function (page 250) is repeated in adjusted period.

Timer 1 Refresh Period
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
Refresh period of Timer 1 Function (page 250). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 1 Repeated (page 252).
Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer will be
activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
second day from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 250), the Timer 1
Function (page 250) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer will be
activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
Weekly
second week from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 250), the Timer 1
Function (page 250) will be activated in selected days adjusted by Timer 1 Day
(page 254).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer will be
activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
Monthly second month from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 250), the Timer 1
Function (page 250) will be activated in selected day of month adjusted by Timer 1
Repeat Day In Month (page 255) or in selected days of week of month adjusted by
Timer 1 Day (page 254) and Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month (page 255).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer will
be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 1 Function (page 250), the
Timer 1 Function (page 250) will be activated.

Timer 1 Weekends
Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Behavior of Timer 1 Function (page 250) on weekends.
Timer 1 Function (page 250) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 1 Function
Including
(page 250) can be active.
Timer 1 Function (page 250) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 1 Function
Skip
(page 250) isn’t active.
Timer 1 Function (page 250) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 1 Function
(page 250) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the weekend, than timer will
Postpone
be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is counted from original date of
first occurrence date.
Timer 1 Day
Range [units] Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday / Friday / Saturday/ Sunday[-]
Default value All OFF Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down buttons.
To change the value of day use Enter button.
Timer 1 Repeat Day

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 1 Function (page 250).
Repeated Day Chose one day in month when Timer 1 Function (page 250) will be activated.
Repeated Day In Week Chose days in one week when Timer 1 Function (page 250) will be activated.

Timer 1 Repeated Day In Week
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.
6 List of setpoints (page 165)
Timer 1 Repeat Day In Month

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 1 Function (page 250) will be activated.
Timer 1 Repeat Week In Month

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 1 Function (page 250) will be activated.

Subgroup: Timer 2
Timer 2 Setup
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description

Timer 2 Function
Range [units] Disable / No Func / TEST / Test OnLd / MFail Blk / Mode OFF [-]
Default value No Func Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
It is possible to choose from following Timer functions. Binary output EXERCISE TIMER 2 (PAGE 458) is
always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen timer function. Timer functions require controller
running in AUTO mode.
IMPORTANT: Binary output is activated always when timer should be activated e.g. even
when controller is in different mode than AUTO.
Timer 1 has the highest priority. Timer 8 has the lowest priority. So if Timer 1 is configured for OFF mode and
Timer 8 is over the same time configured for AUTO mode, controller will work in OFF mode.
Controller activates timer whenever it is powered up even in period, where timer should be already running.
Disable The Timer is disabled.

No Func There is no any other function, only binary output of timer is activated.
TEST When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
binary input Remote TEST.
TEST OnLd When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Remote TEST On Load binary input.
MFail Blk When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Mains Fail Block binary input.
Mode OFF When this option is chosen then the binary output of timer is internally connected to the
Remote OFF binary input.
Timer 2 Repetition
Range [units] Off / Once / Repeated [-]
Default value Off Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Defines repetition of Timer 2 Function (page 257).
Off Timer 2 Function (page 257) will not be activated.

Once Timer 2 Function (page 257) will be activated only one time.
Repeated Timer 2 Function (page 257) will be repeatedly activated.

Timer 2 First Occur. Date
Range [units] [DD/MM/YYYY]
Default value 01/01/2000 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Date of first occurrence ofTimer 2 Function (page 257).
Timer 2 First Occur. Time

Step [-]
Description
Time of first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 257).
Timer 2 Duration
Step [-]
Description
Timer 2 Function (page 257) duration time.

Timer 2 Repeated
Range [units] Daily / Weekly / Monthly / Short Period [-]
Default value Daily Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Repeated interval of Timer 2 Function (page 257).
Daily Timer 2 Function (page 257) is repeated every day.

Weekly Timer 2 Function (page 257) is repeated every week in chosen days.
Monthly Timer 2 Function (page 257) is repeated in chosen day every month or in chosen days of
chosen week of month
Short Period Timer 2 Function (page 257) is repeated in adjusted period.

Timer 2 Refresh Period
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
Refresh period of Timer 2 Function (page 257). Meaning of this setpoint depends on type of repetition
adjusted in Timer 2 Repeated (page 259).
Range [units]: 1 .. 1000 [day]. This setpoint adjust that every X day the timer will be
activated.
Daily Example: If you have daily repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
second day from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 257), the Timer 2
Function (page 257) will be activated.
Range [units]: 1 .. 60 [week]. This setpoint adjust that every X week the timer will be
activated.
Example: If you have weekly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
Weekly
second week from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 257), the Timer 2
Function (page 257) will be activated in selected days adjusted by Timer 2 Day
(page 261).
Range [units]: 1 .. 12 [month]. This setpoint adjust that every X month the timer will be
activated.
Example: If you have monthly repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then every
Monthly second month from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 257), the Timer 2
Function (page 257) will be activated in selected day of month adjusted by Timer 2
Repeat Day In Month (page 262) or in selected days of week of month adjusted by
Timer 2 Day (page 261) and Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month (page 262).
Range [units]: [HH:MM]. This setpoint adjust that every X short period the timer will
be activated.
Short Period Example: If you have short period repetition and you set this setpoint to 2, then
every second minute from first occurrence of Timer 2 Function (page 257), the
Timer 2 Function (page 257) will be activated.

Timer 2 Weekends
Range [units] Including / Skip / Postpone [-]
Default value Including Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Behavior of Timer 2 Function (page 257) on weekends.
Timer 2 Function (page 257) counter is running on the weekends and Timer 2 Function
Including
(page 257) can be active.
Timer 2 Function (page 257) counter is running on the weekends but Timer 2 Function
Skip
(page 257) isn’t active.
Timer 2 Function (page 257) counter isn’t running on the weekends and Timer 2 Function
(page 257) isn’t active. If the activation of timer is counted on the weekend, than timer will
Postpone
be activated after weekend. Another activation of timer is counted from original date of
first occurrence date.
Timer 2 Day
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to include or exclude individual days of week. To select the day use Up and Down buttons.
To change the value of day use Enter button.
Timer 2 Repeat Day

Range [units] Repeated Day / Repeated Day In Week [-]
Default value Repeated Day Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to adjust behavior of monthly repetition of the Timer 2 Function (page 257).
Repeated Day Chose one day in month when Timer 2 Function (page 257) will be activated.
Repeated Day In Week Chose days in one week when Timer 2 Function (page 257) will be activated.

Timer 2 Repeated Day In Week
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to select the day of week when timer will be activated.
Note: More day can be selected. Timer will be activated on the day which happened like the first.
Timer 2 Repeat Day In Month

Range [units] 1..31 [day]
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to chose the day in month when the Timer 2 Function (page 257) will be activated.
Timer 2 Repeat Week In Month

Range [units] 1 .. 5 [week]
Default value 1 week Alternative config NO
Step 1 week
Description
This setpoint adjust the week of month in which the Timer 2 Function (page 257) will be activated.
Group: Plug-In Modules

Slot A
Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Default value ENABLED Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot A.

Slot B
Setpoint group Plug-In Modules Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] ENABLED / DISABLED [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enable or disable module in slot B.
Group: CM-RS232-485
COM1 Mode
Setpoint group CM-RS232-485 Related FW 2.0.0
Step [-]
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM1 channel.

COM1 Communication Speed

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Step [-]
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM1 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line can
be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

COM1 MODBUS Communication Speed
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Step [-]
Description
here.
COM2 Mode
Step [-]
Description
Communication protocol switch for the COM2 channel.

COM2 Communication Speed

Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200[bps]
Step [-]
Description
If the direct mode is selected on COM2 channel, the direct communication speed of controller part of line can
be adjusted here. Speed of second part of line has to be adjusted to the same value.

COM2 MODBUS Communication Speed
Range [units] 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 [bps]
Step [-]
Description
here.
Group: CM-GPRS
Mode
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Range [units] Email+SMS / SMS Only [-]
Default value Email+SMS Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjust the communication mode of module.
Controller is connected to the Internet and is able to send e-mails as well as SMS. The
Email+SMS controller is also accessible via AirGate. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used. Also
APN Name (page 275) has to be adjusted.
SMS Only Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required.
IMPORTANT: When this setpoint is changed the controller has to be restarted to apply
changes.
APN Name
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Range [units] 0..31 characters [-]
Step [-]
Description
APN (Access Point Name) of the GPRS/4G network, provided by GSM operator.

APN User Name
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
User name for the GPRS/4G Access Point if authentication is required. But mostly it is not required and
should be left blank.
APN User Password

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
User password for the GPRS/4G Access Point if authentication is required. But mostly it is not required and
Email Address 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Enter in this setpoint a valid e-mail address where the alarm and event e-mails shall be sent. Leave this
setpoint blank if alarm and event email should not be send.
Note: This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.

Email Address 2
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 3
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 4
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Message Language
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value English Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to set the language of SMS and e-mail.
Note: Numbers correspond with languages in language list. See the chapter for Language selection
(page 72) more information.
This setpoint is common for CM-Ethernet, CM-GPRS and CM-4G-GPS modules.
SMTP User Name

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the username for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server
does not require authentication.
SMTP User Password

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server. Leave the setpoint blank if the SMTP server

SMTP Server Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Default value airgate.comap.cz:9925 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g.
74.125.39.109) or number of port (with colon like a first mark) of the SMTP server. Ask your internet provider
or IT manager for this information.
Note: You may use also any public SMTP server which does not require connection over SSL/TLS
channels. If the device is connected to AirGate the AirGate SMTP server at "airgate.comap.cz" may be
used. Ports 25 and 9925 are supported. After controller connects to AirGate for the first time (or with new
public IP address), it may not be able to send emails for first 5-10 minutes.
SMTP Sender Address

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Enter an existing email address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-
mails that will be sent from the controller.
Note: It is not needed to enter an existing email address, nevertheless valid email format needs to be
followed.
IMPORTANT: This item is obligatory when emails are configured.

Time Zone
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] GMT-12:00 .. GMT+13:00 [hours]
Default value GMT+1:00 hour Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone
setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the Windows task bar) if you are not
sure about your time zone.
Note: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information about
sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occurred.
Event Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] ON / OFF [-]
Default value ON Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Event Messages.
Wrn Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Wrn Messages.

BOC Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables BOC Messages.
Sd Messages
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enables or disables Sd Messages.
Telephone Number 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Enter in this setpoint either a valid GSM phone number where the alarm messages shall be sent. For GSM
numbers use either the national format (i.e. the number you would dial if you wanted to make a local call) or
the full international format beginning with a “+” character followed by the country prefix.
IMPORTANT: Telephone number has to be entered without spaces.

Telephone Number 2
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 3
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 4
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description

DNS IP Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Range [units] Valid IP address [-]
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which is needed to translate domain names in
email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
AirGate Connection
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Range [units] DISABLED / ENABLED [-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enable or disable AirGate connection via CM-GPRS or via CM-4G-GPS.
DISABLED: Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required. AirGate is not used.
ENABLED This mode uses the “AirGate” service. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used. The
AirGate server address is adjusted by the setpoint AirGate Address (page 293).
changes.
AirGate Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Default value airgate.comap.cz Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free AirGate
server provided by ComAp at airgate.comap.cz.

ComAp TCP Port
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65 535[-]
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint is used to adjust the port number, which is used for Ethernet connection to a PC with any of
ComAp PC program (i.e. InteliConfig). This setpoint should be adjusted to 23, which is the default port used
by all ComAp PC programs. A different value should be used only in special situations as e.g. sharing one
public IP address among many controllers or to overcome a firewall restrictions.
IMPORTANT: If AirGate is used, this setpoint has to be adjusted to 23.
Group: CM-4G-GPS
Mode
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Range [units] Email+SMS / SMS Only [-]
Default value Email+SMS Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjust the communication mode of module.
Controller is connected to the Internet and is able to send e-mails as well as SMS. The
Email+SMS controller is also accessible via AirGate. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used. Also
APN Name (page 275) has to be adjusted.
SMS Only Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required.
changes.

Required Connection Type
Setpoint group CM-4G-GPS Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] 2G/3G/4G/Automatic [-]
Default value Automatic Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint adjusts preferred connection type of CM-4G-GPS module.
APN Name
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
APN (Access Point Name) of the GPRS/4G network, provided by GSM operator.
APN User Name

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
User name for the GPRS/4G Access Point if authentication is required. But mostly it is not required and

APN User Password
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
User password for the GPRS/4G Access Point if authentication is required. But mostly it is not required and
Email Address 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 2
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Email Address 3
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 4
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Message Language
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description

SMTP User Name
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
SMTP User Password

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
SMTP Server Address

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description

SMTP Sender Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
followed.
Time Zone
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Event Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Wrn Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
BOC Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Sd Messages
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 2
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description

Telephone Number 3
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
Telephone Number 4
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description

AirGate Connection
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint enable or disable AirGate connection via CM-GPRS or via CM-4G-GPS.
DISABLED: Only SMS are sent. Internet-enabled SIM card is not required. AirGate is not used.
ENABLED This mode uses the “AirGate” service. Internet-enabled SIM card must be used. The
AirGate server address is adjusted by the setpoint AirGate Address (page 293).
changes.
AirGate Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description

ComAp TCP Port
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65 535[-]
Step [-]
Description
Group: CM-Ethernet
Email Address 1
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Email Address 2
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 3
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Email Address 4
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Message Language
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description
Time Zone
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Event Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

Wrn Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
BOC Message
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description
Sd Messages
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Step [-]
Description

SMTP UserName
Setpoint group CM-Ethernet Related FW 2.0.0
Step [-]
Description
SMTP User Password

Step [-]
Description
SMTP Server Address

Step [-]
Description

SMTP Sender Address
Step [-]
Description
followed.
IP Address Mode
Range [units] FIXED / AUTOMATIC [-]
Default value AUTOMATIC Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the ethernet connection is adjusted.
DISABLED: The Ethernet connection is fixed by means of the setpoints IP Addr, NetMask, GateIP,
DNS IP Address.
This method should be used for a classic Ethernet or internet connection. When this type
of connection opens, the controller is specified by its IP address. This means that it
would be inconvenient if the IP address were not fixed (static).
ENABLED: The Ethernet connection setting is obtained automatically from the DHCP server. The
obtained settings are then copied to the related setpoints. If the process of obtaining the
settings from the DHCP server is not successful, the value 000.000.000.000 is copied to
the setpoint IP address and the module continues to try to obtain the settings.

IP Address
Default value 192.168.1.254 Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the IP Address is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 289) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the ethernet interface
of the controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 289) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The IP address is assigned by the
DHCP server.
Subnet Mask
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Subnet Mask is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 289) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the Subnet Mask. Ask your IT
specialist for help with this setting.
If IP Address Mode (page 289) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The Subnet Mask is assigned by the
DHCP server.
Gateway IP
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the Gateway IP is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 289) is DISABLE this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the gateway of
the network segment where the controller is connected.
If IP Address Mode (page 289) is ENABLED this setpoint is used to display the gateway IP address which
has been assigned by the DHCP server.
A gateway is a device which connects the respective segment with the other segments and/or Internet.

DNS IP Address 1
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 1 is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 289) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which
is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 289) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.
DNS IP Address 2
Step [-]
Description
The setpoint is used to select the method how the DNS Address 2 is adjusted.
If IP Address Mode (page 289) is FIXED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which
is needed to translate domain names in email addresses and server names into correct IP addresses.
If IP Address Mode (page 289) is AUTOMATIC this setpoint is inactive. The DNS server IP address is
assigned by the DHCP server.
MODBUS Server
Step [-]
Description
Enable or disable MODBUS communication via ethernet interface.

SNMP Agent
Step [-]
Description
Enable or disable SNMP v1 Agent.
SNMP RD Community String

Default value public Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
SNMP Community String only for reading.
SNMP WR Community String

Default value private Alternative config NO
Step [-]
Description
SNMP Community String for writing and reading.

Step [-]
Description
IP address 1 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.

Step [-]
Description
IP address 2 for receiving SNMP Traps. Leave this setpoint blank if SNMP traps should not be send.
AirGate Connection
Step [-]
Description
This setpoint selects the Ethernet connection mode.
DISABLED: This is a standard mode in which the controller listens to the incoming traffic and answers
the TCP/IP queries addressed to it. This mode requires the controller to be accessible
from the remote device (PC), i.e. it must be accessible at a public and static IP address if
you want to connect to it from the internet.
ENABLED This mode enables the AirGate service. The AirGate server address is adjusted by the
setpoint AirGate Address (page 293). Also the standard TCP/IP is enabled.
AirGate Address
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] [-]
Step [-]
Description

ComAp TCP Port
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS; CM-Ethernet
Range [units] 0 .. 65 535[-]
Step [-]
Description
Group: Alternate Configuration

Subgroup: Configuration 1
Nominal Frequency 1
Step 1 Hz
Description
Note: This value is used when any other alternate configuration is not active.

Range [units] 80 .. 20000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
Nominal system voltage (phase to neutral).

Nominal Voltage Ph-Ph 1
Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
Nominal Current 1
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Step 1A
Description
Connection Type 1
Range [units] Monophase / Splitphase / 3Ph3Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph4Wire[-]
Step [-]
Description
Connection type:

Split Phase
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye

Split Phase Delta
Note: This value is used when binary input ALTERNATE CONFIG 2 (PAGE 401) is active.
Nominal Frequency 2
Step 1 Hz
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 20000 [V]
Step 1V
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 40000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
Nominal Current 2
Range [units] 1 .. 10000 [A]
Step 1A
Description
Connection type 2
Range [units] Monophase / Splitphase / 3Ph3Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph4Wire[-]
Step [-]
Description
Connection type:

Split Phase
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye

Split Phase Delta
Nominal Frequency 3
Step 1 Hz
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 20 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description

Range [units] 80 .. 40 000 [V]
Step 1V
Description
Nominal Current 3
Range [units] 1 .. 10 000 [A]
Step 1A
Description
Connection type 3
Range [units] Monophase / Splitphase / 3Ph3Wire / High Leg D / 3Ph4Wire [-]
Step [-]
Description
Connection type:

Split Phase
Open Delta
Ungrounded Wye

Split Phase Delta
Group: PLC
PLC Setpoint 1
Setpoint group PLC Related FW 2.0.0
Range [units] Depends on resolution of value [-]
Depends on resolution of
value [-]
Step Depends on resolution of value [-]
Description
Adjustable value for input in PLC logic.
Configuration of setpoint:
Configuration is made via configuration PC tool InteliConfig
Image 8.42 Screen of configuration from InteliConfig
PLC Setpoint name Name of the setpoint (0..32 characters)

Dimension Dimension of value of the setpoint.
Resolution of the value of the setpoint. Resolution adjust number of decimal places
Resolution
in low and high limit.
The lowest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
Low limit
by resolution of setpoint.
The highest value of setpoint. Digit place of this value can be decrease or increase
High limit

PLC Setpoint 2
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 3
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 4
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 5
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 6
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 7
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 8
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 9
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 10
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 11
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 12
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 13
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 14
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 15
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 16
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 17
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 18
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 19
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 20
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 21
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 22
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 23
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 24
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 25
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 26
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 27
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 28
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 29
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 30
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 31
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 32
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 33
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 34
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 35
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 36
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 37
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 38
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 39
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 40
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 41
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 42
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 43
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 44
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 45
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 46
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 47
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 48
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 49
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 50
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 51
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 52
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 53
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 54
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 55
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 56
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 57
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 58
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 59
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 60
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 61
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 62
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 63
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

PLC Setpoint 64
value [-]
Description

Resolution
Low limit
High limit

8.1.2 Values
What values are:
Values (or quantities) are analog or binary data objects, measured or computed by the controller, that are
intended for reading from the controller screen, PC, MODBUS, etc. Values are organized into groups according
to their meaning.
Invalid flag
If valid data is not available for a particular value, the invalid flag is set to it. This situation may be due to the
following:
The value is not being evaluated in the scope of the current application and configuration.
Sensor fail has been detected on an analog input.
The communication with extension module is interrupted.
A value containing the invalid flag is displayed as “####” in InteliConfig and on the controller screen. If such a
value is read out via MODBUS, it will contain the data 32768 in the case of signed values and 65535 in the case
of unsigned values.
List of values groups

Group: Bus Left 367
Group: Power Management 374
Group: Load Control 377
Group: Voltage/PF Control 378
Group: Controler I/O 378
Group: Statistics 379
Group: Info 380
Group: Log Bout 384
Group: CM-GPRS 386
Group: CM-Ethernet 391
Group: Date/Time 394
Group: Plug-In I/O 394
Group: PLC 395
For full list of setpoints go to the chapter List of values (page 365).

List of values
Bus Left Bus Right Binary Inputs 378
Bus Left Import 367 Bus Right Frequency 373 Binary Outputs 378
Bus Left kW L1 367 Bus Right Voltage L1-N 373 CAN16 383
Bus Left kW L2 367 Bus Right Voltage L2-N 373 CAN32 383
Bus Left kW L3 367 Bus Right Voltage L3-N 374 Reg16 383
Bus Left kVAr 367 Bus Right Voltage L1-L2 374 Reg32 384
Bus Left kVAr L1 368 Bus Right Voltage L2-L3 374 Gen Loaded 16 384
Bus Left kVAr L2 368 Bus Right Voltage L3-L1 374 Gen Loaded 32 384
Bus Left kVAr L3 368

Power Management Statistics
Bus Left kVA 368
Actual Reserve 374 Bus Left kWh 379
Bus Left kVA L1 368
Actual Relative Reserve 375 Bus Left kVArh 379
Bus Left kVA L2 369
Start Reserve 375 Sum Bus kVAh 379
Bus Left kVA L3 369
Stop Reserve 375 Bus Right kVArh 379
Bus Left Power Factor 369
Start Relative Reserve 375 Bus Right kWh 380
Bus Left Load Character 369
Stop Relative Reserve 375 Running Hours 380
Bus Left Power Factor L1 369
Bus Left Load Character Actual Active Power In
L1 370 PM 376 Info
Bus Left Power Factor L2 370 Actual Reactive Power In Application Mode 380
Bus Left Load Character PM 376 Breaker State 380

L2 370 Running Nominal Power In Timer Text 381
Bus Left Power Factor L3 370 PM 376 Connection Type 381
Bus Left Load Character Running Nominal Power SPI Module A 381
L3 370 Of All 376
SPI Module B 381
Bus Left Frequency 371 Available Nominal Power 376
Timer Value 382
Bus Left Voltage L1-N 371 Minimal Running Nominal
ID String 382
Power 377
Bus Left Voltage L2-N 371 FW Version 382
Actual Power Band 377
Bus Left Voltage L3-N 371 Application 382
Next Power Band 377
Bus Left Voltage L1-L2 371 FW Branch 382
Bus Left Voltage L2-L3 372 Password Decode 383
Speed/Load Control
Bus Left Voltage L3-L1 372
Loadsharing Output 377
Bus Left Current L1 372 Log Bout
Bus Left Current L2 372 Log Bout 1 384
Voltage/PF Control
Bus Left Current L3 372 Log Bout 2 385
Varsharing Output 378
Slip Frequency 373 Log Bout 3 385
Slip Angle 373 Controler I/O Log Bout 4 385
Log Bout 5 385
Battery Volts 378

Log Bout 6 385
Log Bout 7 386
Date/Time
Time 394
Date 394

Group: Bus Left
Bus Left Import
Value group Bus Left Related FW 2.0.0
Units kW
Comm object 8703 Related applications MCBMGCB, BTB
Description
Imported kW from Bus Left.
6 back to List of values
Bus Left kW L1
Units kW
Description
Bus Left active power in phase L1.
Bus Left kW L2
Units kW
Description
Bus Left kW L3
Units kW
Description
Bus Left kVAr

Units kVAr
Description
kVAr from Bus Left.

Bus Left kVAr L1
Units kVAr
Description
Bus Left reactive power in phase L1.
Bus Left kVAr L2

Units kVAr
Description
Bus Left kVAr L3

Units kVAr
Description
Bus Left kVA

Units kVA
Description
Bus Left apparent imported power.
Bus Left kVA L1

Units kVA
Description
Bus Left apparent power in phase L1.

Bus Left kVA L2
Units kVA
Description
Bus Left kVA L3

Units kVA
Description
Bus Left Power Factor

Units Hz
Description
Bus Left power factor.
Bus Left Load Character

Units Hz
Description
Character of Bus Left load. “L” means inductive load, “C” is capacitive and “R” is resistive load (power factor
= 1).
Bus Left Power Factor L1

Units Hz
Description
Bus Left power factor in phase L1.

Bus Left Load Character L1
Units Hz
Description
= 1).

Units Hz
Description

Units Hz
Description
= 1).

Units Hz
Description

Units Hz
Description
= 1).

Bus Left Frequency
Units Hz
Description
Frequency of Bus Left.
Bus Left Voltage L1-N

Units V
Description
Bus Left voltage on phase 1.

Units V
Description

Units V
Description
Bus Left Voltage L1-L2

Units V
Description
Bus Left phase to phase voltage between L1 and L2 phases.

Units V
Description

Units V
Description
Bus Left Current L1

Units A
Description
Bus Leftcurrent in phase L1.
Bus Left Current L2

Units A
Description
Bus Left Current L3

Units A
Description

Slip Frequency
Units Hz
Description
Differential frequency between the mains and bus.
Slip Angle
Units °
Description
Angle between tha phasors ot the mains and bus.
Group: Bus Right

Bus Right Frequency
Value group Bus Right Related FW 2.0.0
Units V
Description
Frequency of the Bus Right.
Bus Right Voltage L1-N

Units V
Description
Bus Right voltage on phase L1.

Units V
Description
Bus Right voltage on L2.

Units V
Description
Bus Right voltage on phase L3.
Bus Right Voltage L1-L2

Units V
Description
Phase to phase Bus Right voltage between L1-L2.

Units V
Description

Units V
Description
Group: Power Management

Actual Reserve
Value group Power Management Related FW 2.0.0
Units kW
Description
Actual absolute reserve in power management.

Actual Relative Reserve
Units %
Description
Actual relative reserve in power management.
Start Reserve
Units kW
Description
Actual absolute reserve for start.
Stop Reserve
Units kW
Description
Actual absolute reserve - when the reserve is higher than this value the last started gen-set (the gen-set with
the highest priority) is stopped.
Start Relative Reserve

Units %
Description
Actual relative reserve for start.
Stop Relative Reserve

Units %
Description
Actual relative reserve - when the relative reserve is higher than this value the last started gen-set (the gen-
set with the highest priority) is stopped.

Actual Active Power In PM
Units kW
Description
Actual value of active power from all gen-sets running in power management.
Actual Reactive Power In PM

Units kVAr
Description
Actual value of reactive power from all gen-sets running in power management.
Running Nominal Power In PM

Units kW
Description
Actual nominal power of all gen-sets in power management, which are running.
Running Nominal Power Of All

Units kW
Description
Actual nominal power of all gen-sets, which are running.
Available Nominal Power

Units kW
Description
Available nominal power of all gen-sets in power management.

Minimal Running Nominal Power
Units kW
Description
Actual minimal nominal power of all gen-sets, which are running.
Actual Power Band

Units -
Description
State of all gen-sets in actual power band of power management. 1 means that gen-set is running, 0 means
that gen set is stopped.
Note: This value is evaluated only in controller with the lowest CAN address.
Next Power Band

Units -
Description
State of all gen-sets in next higher power band of power management.. 1 means that gen-set is running, 0
means that gen set is stopped.
Note: This value is evaluated only in controller with the lowest CAN address.
Group: Load Control

Loadsharing Output
Value group Load Control Related FW 2.0.0
Units %
Description
Load sharing regulation loop output.

Group: Voltage/PF Control
Varsharing Output
Value group Voltage/PF Control Related FW 2.0.0
Units kVAr
Description
Varsharing regulation loop output.
Group: Controler I/O

Battery Volts
Value group Controler I/O Related FW 2.0.0
Units V
Description
Controller supply voltage.
Binary Inputs
Units [-]
Comm object 8235 Related applications MCB, MGCB; BTB
Description
State of the binary inputs of the controller.
Binary Outputs
Units [-]
Description
State of the binary outputs of the controller.

Group: Statistics
Bus Left kWh
Value group Statistics Related FW 2.0.0
Units kWh
Description
Sum of kWh from the Bus Left.
Note: This value can be also switch into one decimal power format (via InteliConfig PC tool). In this
case the range of value is decrease 10 times.
Bus Left kVArh

Units kVArh
Description
Sum of kVArh from the Bus Left.
Sum Bus kVAh

Units kVAh
Description
This value shows sum of kVAh that were transfered through CB.
Bus Right kVArh

Units kVArh
Description

Bus Right kWh
Units kWh
Description
Running Hours
Units hours
Description
Engine operation hours counter. The engine hours are incremented in the controller while the engine is
running.
Note: If an ECU is configured and it provides engine hours value, the value is taken from the ECU.
Group: Info
Application Mode
Value group Info Related FW 2.0.0
Units [-]
Description
This Value mirrors the active application in the controller.
The intend of use it to display the value of the active application in InteliConfig or at the screen of the
controller.
Breaker State
Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual “breaker state” message which is shown on the main screen of the controller.

Timer Text
Units [-]
Description
The value contains the numeric code of the “Current process timer” text which is shown on the main screen
of the controller.
The assignment of texts to the codes can be obtained using InteliConfig. Open any connection (also offline
with a previously saved archive) and go to the Tools ribbon -> Generate CFG image (all). The resulting file
will contain the assignment of texts to the codes.
Connection Type
Units [-]
Description
The text of this value represents the connection type which is adjusted in setpoint Connection type (page
176).
SPI Module A
Units [-]
Description
The name of plug-in module which is inserted in slot A.
SPI Module B
Units [-]
Description
The name of plug-in module which is inserted in slot B.

Timer Value
Units [HH:MM:SS]
Description
The value contains the "Current process timer" value which is shown on the main screen of the controller.
ID String
Units [-]
Description
Name of controller which is used in InteliConfig in command bar.
FW Version
Units [-]
Description
Major and minor firmware version number.
Application
Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual application in controller.
FW Branch
Units [-]
Description
The value contains actual branch of firmware in controller.

Password Decode
Units [-]
Description
This value contains a number which can be used for retrieving a lost password. Send this number together
with the controller serial number to your distributor if you have lost your password.
CAN16
Units V
Description
Bits of this value show "1" if the controller receives messages from the controller which has address
corresponding with the bit position. Bit 0 represents address 1 etc. This value contains information about
controllers with addresses 1-16.
CAN32
Units V
Description
Bits of this value show "1" if the controller receives messages from the controller which has address
corresponding with the bit position. Bit 0 represents address 17 etc. This value contains information about
Reg16
Units
Description
Bits of this value show "1" if the controller which has address corresponding with the bit position plays active
role in the power management. Bit 0 represents address 1 etc. This value contains information about

Reg32
Units
Description
Gen Loaded 16
Units V
Description
Gen Loaded 32
Units V
Description
Group: Log Bout

Log Bout 1
Value group Log Bout Related FW 2.0.0
Units [-]
Description
State of binary outputs.

Log Bout 2
Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 3
Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 4
Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 5
Units [-]
Description
Log Bout 6
Units [-]
Description

Log Bout 7
Units [-]
Description
Group: CM-GPRS
AirGate Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
Value group Related FW 2.0.0
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
Diagnostic code for AirGate connection. Helps in troubleshooting.
Code Description
0 SIM card is not inserted
1 Controller registered, waiting for authorization
2 Not possible to register, controller blacklisted
3 Not possible to register, server has no more capacity
4 Not possible to register, other reason
5 Controller registered and authorized
AirGate ID
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
InteliConfig or any other supported PC tool.

AirGate Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
Code Description
0 SIM card is not inserted
Connection Type
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
The type of data connection.
Cell Diag Code

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
Diagnostic code for the CM-GPRS or CM-4G-GPS module.
GSM Diag Code – Common list of diagnostic codes for cellular modules
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 Modul is switched off
3 Module is switched on

4 Module – error in initialization
5 Module – not possible to set the APN
6 Module – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 Module – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 Module – not accepted DNS IP address
9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or
11
unknown status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by
14
locked SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected
19 No CDMA network
20 Unsuccessful registration to CDMA network
21 SIMCom/ME909s: can´t read FW version
22 SIMCom: GSM signal not found
23 SIMCom: can´t detect module speed
24 SIMCom: HW reset issued
25 PUK is required
26 Error of SIM card detected
27 ME909s: can't set module bps
28 ME909s: can't set link configuration
29 ME909s: can't do power-off
30 ME909s: can't do power-on
31 ME909s: can't do hardware reset
32 ME909s: ME909s not started
33 ME909s: switch off issued
34 ME909s: switch on issued
35 ME909s: HW reset issued
36 ME909s: can't switch echo off
37 ME909s: can't find out state of registration
38 ME909s: GSM signal not found
39 ME909s: no SIM memory for SMS
40 ME909s: waiting for registration

41 Can't read operator name
42 ME909s: can't set flow control
43 APN not typed
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate
Cell ErrorRate
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Description
This value contains information about relative quality of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS module
or by CM-4G-GPS module. The lower value means higher quality of signal.
Cell Signal Lev

CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units %
Description
This value contains information about relative strength of the cellular signal received by the CM-GPRS
module or by CM-4G-GPS module. It is a relative value helping to find the best signal and for troubleshooting
cases.
Cell Status
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
The text of this value represents the status of the GSM modem.

Last Email Result
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.
Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
4 Maximum length of data can’t be read.
5 No appeal to send command.
6 Command can’t be send.
7 Command can’t be send.
8 HELO command was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
18 SMTP server refused the data of email.
19 SMTP server refused the data of email.
20 QUIT command was refused.
21 Lost of connection.
23 Error during closing the connection.
24 No answer from server.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
28 Error of encoding.
29 There was no attempt to send email.

Operator
CM-GPRS; CM-4G-
GPS (4G part)
Units [-]
Description
The name of operator which to SIM card is connected.
Note: If roaming service is used then prefix "R" is added before the name of operator.
Group: CM-Ethernet
AirGate Status
Value group CM-Ethernet Related FW 2.0.0
Units [-]
Description
Code Description
0 Ethernet cable is disconected
AirGate ID
Value group CM-EthernetInfo Related FW 2.0.0
Units [-]
Description
Identification string generated by AirGate server for the purpose of establishing communication via
InteliConfig or any other supported PC tool.

Current DNS
Units [-]
Description
Current domain name server.
ETH Interface Status

Units [-]
Description
Current status of ethernet communication.
Current Gateway
Units [-]
Description
Current gateway address.
Current IP Address
Units [-]
Description
Current IP address of the controller.

Last Email Result
Units [-]
Description
Result of last email, which was sent by controller.
Code Description
0 Email was successfully sent.
2 It is not possible to establish connection with SMTP server.
3 SMTP server is not ready for communication.
8 HELO command was refused.
9 EHLO commnad was refused.
11 AUTH LOGIN command was refused.
12 Wrong user name.
13 Wrong password.
14 MAIL FROM command was refused.
15 RCPT TO command was refused.
16 DATA command was refused.
17 Sending of email failed.
20 QUIT command was refused.
25 It is impossible to create data for command DATA.
26 It is impossible to read data for command DATA.
27 Email address can’t be read.
30 SMTP server address translation error (from DNS server).
31 Error reading email content data (24327).
MAC Address
Units [-]
Description
Current MAC address of the controller ethernet interface.

Current Subnet Mask
Units [-]
Description
Current subnet mask.
Group: Date/Time
Time
Value group Date/Time Related FW 2.0.0
Units HH:MM:SS
Description
Shows setup time.
Date
Value group Date/Time Related FW 2.0.0
Units DD.MM.YYYY
Description
Shows setup date.
Group: Plug-In I/O

EM BIO A
Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 2.0.0
Units [-]
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot A.

EM BIO B
Value group Plug-In I/O Related FW 2.0.0
Units [-]
Description
Binary inputs from extension module in slot B.
Group: PLC
PLC Resource 1
Value group PLC Related FW 2.0.0
Units [-]
Description
Internal state of PLC countdowns (e.g. state of block Timer etc.).
PLC Resource 2
Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 3
Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 4
Units [-]
Description

PLC Resource 5
Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 6
Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 7
Units [-]
Description
PLC Resource 8
Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 1
Units [-]
Description
State of binary outputs of PLC.

PLC-BOUT 2
Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 3
Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 4
Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 5
Units [-]
Description
PLC-BOUT 6
Units [-]
Description

PLC-BOUT 7
Units [-]
Description

8.1.3 Logical binary inputs
What Logical binary inputs are:
Logical binary inputs are inputs for binary values and functions.
Alphabetical groups of Logical binary inputs

LBI: A 401
LBI: B 402
LBI: E 428
LBI: F 428
LBI: G 429
LBI: H 429
LBI: L 429
LBI: M 430
LBI: N 431
LBI: R 431
LBI: T 433
For full list of Logical binary inputs go to the chapter Logical binary inputs alphabetically (page 400).

Logical binary inputs alphabetically
Access Lock 401 BIN Protection 35 419

Alternate Config 2 401 BIN Protection 36 419
Alternate Config 3 401 BIN Protection 37 420
BIN Protection 1 402 BIN Protection 38 420
BIN Protection 12 407 BTB Button 426
BIN Protection 13 408 BTB Feedback 427
BIN Protection 14 408 Emergency MAN 428
BIN Protection 15 409 Fault Reset Button 428
BIN Protection 16 409 Force BTB Close 428
BIN Protection 17 410 Group link 429
BIN Protection 18 410 Horn Reset Button 429
BIN Protection 19 411 Lang Selection 1 429
BIN Protection 20 411 Lang Selection 2 430
BIN Protection 21 412 Load Res 2 Active 430
BIN Protection 22 412 Min Run Power Active 430
BIN Protection 23 413 Not Used 431
BIN Protection 24 413 Remote AUTO 431
BIN Protection 25 414 Remote Ctrl Lock 431
BIN Protection 26 414 Remote MAN 432
BIN Protection 27 415 Remote OFF 432
BIN Protection 28 415 Remote Start/Stop 433
BIN Protection 29 416 Time Stamp Act 433
BIN Protection 30 416

LBI: A
Access Lock
Related FW 2.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB, BTB
Comm object 1
Description
When this input is closed, no setpoints can be adjusted from controller’s front panel and controller mode
(OFF / MAN / AUTO) cannot be changed.
Note: Access Lock does not protect setpoints and mode changing from InteliConfig. To avoid
unqualified changes the selected setpoints have to be password protected.
Also the buttons Fault Reset and Horn Reset are not blocked at all and buttons Start and Stop
in MAN mode are not blocked.
6 back to Logical binary inputs alphabetically
Alternate Config 2
Comm object 859
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Configuration group are switched to the second set (setpoints with number 2).
Alternate Config 3
Comm object 860
Description
This binary input can switch between configuration sets. When this binary input is active, setpoints in
Alternate Configuration group are switched to the third set (setpoints with number 3).

LBI: B
BIN Protection 1
Comm object 9999
Description
This binary input is for general input function used as alarm.
Protection types
Monitoring Binary input is not used for protection or any other function. Signal is only
monitored.
HistRecOnl Binary input is not used for protection. Only history record is made if binary input is
active.
AL Indic Binary input is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if binary input
is active.
Wrn Binary input is used for warning protection only.
BO Breaker open protection without reset. Protection is signalized with red LED status
but the alarm is not in alarm list.
BOR Breaker open protection with reset. Protection is signalized with red LED status
and alarm is recorded in alarm list.
FLS Sensor fail protection.
BIN Protection 02
Comm object 9998
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 03
Comm object 9997
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 04
Comm object 9996
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 05
Comm object 9995
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 06
Comm object 9994
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 07
Comm object 9993
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 08
Comm object 9992
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 09
Comm object 9991
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 10
Comm object 9990
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 11
Comm object 9989
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 12
Comm object 9988
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 13
Comm object 9987
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 14
Comm object 9986
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 15
Comm object 9985
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 16
Comm object 9984
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 17
Comm object 9983
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 18
Comm object 9982
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 19
Comm object 9981
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 20
Comm object 9980
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 21
Comm object 9979
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 22
Comm object 9978
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 23
Comm object 9977
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 24
Comm object 9976
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 25
Comm object 9975
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 26
Comm object 9974
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 27
Comm object 9973
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 28
Comm object 9972
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 29
Comm object 9971
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 30
Comm object 9970
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 31
Comm object 9969
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 32
Comm object 9968
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 33
Comm object 9967
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 34
Comm object 9966
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 35
Comm object 9965
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 36
Comm object 9964
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 37
Comm object 9963
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 38
Comm object 9962
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 39
Comm object 9961
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 40
Comm object 9960
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 41
Related FW 2.0.0 Related applications AMF, MRS MINT, SPtM
Comm object 9959
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 42
Comm object 9958
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 43
Comm object 9957
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 44
Comm object 9956
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 45
Comm object 9955
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 46
Comm object 9954
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BIN Protection 47
Comm object 9953
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.
BIN Protection 48
Comm object 9952
Description
Protection types
monitored.
active.
is active.

BTB Button
Related FW 2.0.0 Related applications MCB, MGCB
Comm object 194
Description
This binary input has the same function as BTB button on the InteliMains 210 front panel. It is evaluated
in MAN mode only.

BTB Feedback
Comm object 65
Description
Use this input for indication whether the bus circuit breaker is open or closed.
Image 8.106 BTB Feedback 1
Image 8.107 BTB Feedback 2

LBI: E
Emergency MAN
Comm object 45
Description
This input is designed to allow the gen-set or breakers to be controlled externally, not by the controller. This
feature can be useful in case of or in case of some failure, which disables the gen-set or breakers to be
controlled by the controller, but the gen-set itself is operational.
The controller behaves in the following way:
Shows the text EmergMan in the engine status on the main screen.
Stops all functions regarding the gen-set or breaker control, deactivates all outputs related to it.
Stop Fail alarm is not being evaluated and stop solenoid is not activated if nonzero speed is detected.
When the input is deactivated, the controller takes control according to the situation in the moment of
deactivation.
LBI: F
Fault Reset Button
Comm object 191
Description
Binary input has the same function as Fault Reset button on the InteliMains 210 front panel.
Force BTB Close

Related FW 2.0.0 Related applications BTB
Comm object 952
Description
Close BTB regardless on the setpoint setting. Synchronize both sides regardless on the setpoints setting.
IMPORTANT: Setpoint Mains Coupling (page 171) has higher priority than this LBI.
Note: When LBI is active, BTB can be opened only due to BTB open protection or BTB Fail.

LBI: G
Group link
Comm object 59
Description
This input is used for logical connection and disconnection of two gen-set groups selected with setpoints
Group Link L (page 201) and Group Link R (page 202). If the input is active, then the two selected groups will
perform power management, load sharing and kVAr sharing together as one large group.
Note: This function is independent on the group which the particular controller belongs to, i.e. the
controller can provide linking function e.g. for groups 3,4 although it belongs to group 2.
LBI: H
Horn Reset Button
Comm object 192
Description
Binary input has the same function as Horn reset button on the InteliMains 210 front panel.
LBI: L
Lang Selection 1
Comm object 107
Description
Use this binary input with binary input LANG SELECTION 2 (PAGE 430) to choose required language of
controller. The system is based on binary numbers.
Binary input Binary number Active language

Language Selection 1 is active 1 First language (English)
LANG SELECTION 2 (PAGE 430) is active 2 Second language
Language Selection 1 and LANG SELECTION
3 Third language
2 (PAGE 430) are active

Lang Selection 2
Comm object 108
Description
Use this binary input with binary input LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 429) to choose required language of
controller. The system is based on binary numbers.
Binary input Binary number Active language

LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 429) is active 1 First language (English)
Lang Selection 2 is active 2 Second language
LANG SELECTION 1 (PAGE 429) and Lang
3 Third language
Selection 2 are active
Load Res 2 Active

Comm object 49
Description
Activation of this logical binary input changes the set of load reserve setpoint, which are used in Power
management (page 78). This input is used to activate the load reserve set 2 instead of the set 1, which is
active by default.
LBI: M
Min Run Power Active
Comm object 52
Description
This input is used to activate the function minimal running power, which is adjusted via setpoint #Min Run
Power (page 197).

LBI: N
Not Used
Comm object 184
Description
Binary input has no function. Use this configuration when binary input is not used.
LBI: R
Remote AUTO
Comm object 620
Description
The controller is switched to the AUTO mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
binary input is closed. When opens controller is switched back to previous mode.
This binary input has the lowest priority from Remote OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST binary inputs
Remote control priority:
Remote OFF (Highest priority)
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote AUTO (Lowest Priority)
Remote Ctrl Lock
Comm object 4
Description
If the input is active, the controller will not accept any actions regarding the system control – e.g. writing of
commands and setpoint changes via remote communication interfaces.

Remote MAN
Comm object 618
Description
The controller is switched to the MAN mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
Remote TEST
Remote MAN
Remote OFF
Comm object 617
Description
The controller is switched to the OFF mode (there are four modes OFF / MAN / AUTO / TEST) when this
Remote TEST
Remote MAN

Remote Start/Stop
Comm object 38
Description
Use this input to start and stop the gen-set in AUTO mode and TEST mode.
Taken action in MCB, MGCB application (AUTO Mode)

System Start/Stop is activated regardless the Mains is OK
MGCB is closed in case of MGCB application
Active
Parallel operation - Baseload, import/export
Reverse synchronising in case of mains return
System Start/Stop deactivated
Inactive
MGCB opened
Note: In the SPTM and AMF application there are more LBIs that can influence the state of the
application and can be in the collision with the Common LBI Remote Start/Stop.
LBI: T
Time Stamp Act
Comm object 125
Description
Binary input activates time stamp writing to history depending on Date/Time:Time stamp act and Time
Stamp Per setpoints.

8.1.4 Logical binary outputs
What Logical binary outputs are:
Logical binary outputs are outputs for binary values and functions.
Alphabetical groups of Logical binary outputs

LBO: A 436
LBO: B 449
LBO: E 458
LBO: F 459
LBO: H 459
LBO: M 459
LBO: N 460
LBO: S 460
For full list of Logical binary outputs go to the chapter Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 435).

Logical binary outputs alphabetically
AL Battery Voltage 436 BIN 1 Status 449

AL Bus Left Fail 436 BIN 2 Status 450
AL Bus Left Frequency 436 BIN 3 Status 450
AL Bus Left > Frequency 436 BIN 4 Status 451
AL Bus Left > Voltage 436 BIN 5 Status 451
AL Bus Left < Frequency 437 BIN 6 Status 452
AL Bus Left < Voltage 437 BIN 7 Status 452
AL Bus Left Voltage 437 BIN 8 Status 453
AL Bus Right Frequency 437 BTB Close/Open 453
AL Bus Right Voltage 437 BTB OFF Coil 455
AL Common BOR 437 BTB ON Coil 456
AL Common Fls 438 BTB UV Coil 457
AL Common Wrn 438 Bus Right Healthy 458
AL Overcurrent 438 Bus Left Healthy 458
AL Overload BOR 438 Exercise Timer 1 458
AL Overload Wrn 438 Exercise Timer 2 458
Alarm 439 Fault Reset 459
AIN Switch01 439 Heartbeat 459
AIN Switch02 440 Horn 459
AIN Switch03 440 Mode AUTO 459
AIN Switch04 441 Mode MAN 460
AIN Switch05 441 Mode OFF 460
AIN Switch06 442 Not In AUTO 460
AIN Switch07 442 Not Used 460
AIN Switch08 443 Still Log 0 460
AIN Switch09 443 Still Log 1 461
AIN Switch10 444 Synchro 461
AIN Switch11 444 System Reserve OK 461
AIN Switch12 445
AIN Switch13 445
AIN Switch14 446
AIN Switch15 446
AIN Switch16 447
AIN Switch17 447
AIN Switch18 448
AIN Switch19 448
AIN Switch20 449

LBO: A
AL Battery Voltage
Comm object 1293
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Battery Voltage (page 508)alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t
confirm.
6 back to Logical binary outputs alphabetically
AL Bus Left Fail

Comm object 197
Description
Output for signaling Bus LeftFailure. This output is active when at least one Bus Left frequency alarm or at
least one Bus Left voltage alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirmed.
AL Bus Left Frequency

Comm object 1271
Description
This output is active when at least one Bus Left frequency alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Bus Left > Frequency

Comm object 2094
Description
Signalisation of released protection for Bus Left overfrequency.
AL Bus Left > Voltage

Comm object 2092
Description
Signalisation of released protection for Bus Left overvoltage.

AL Bus Left < Frequency
Comm object 2095
Description
Signalisation of released protection for Bus Left uderfrequency.
AL Bus Left < Voltage

Comm object 2093
Description
Signalisation of released protection for Bus Left undervoltage.
AL Bus Left Voltage

Comm object 1270
Description
This output is active when at least one Bus Left voltage alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Bus Right Frequency

Comm object 1266
Description
This output is active when at least one Bus Right frequency alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Bus Right Voltage

Comm object 1263
Description
This output is active when at least one Bus Right voltage alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Common BOR
Related FW 2.0.0 Related applications BTB
Comm object 9
Description
Signalisation of released common breaker open protection with reset.

AL Common Fls
Comm object 6
Description
Output closes when any sensor fail alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No sensor fail alarm is active and
Fault reset button is pressed
AL Common Wrn
Comm object 3
Description
Output closes when any warning alarm appears.
The output opens, if:
No warning alarm is active and
Fault reset button is pressed
AL Overcurrent
Comm object 109
Description
This output is active when the BOR Overcurrent IDMT (page 524) or MPR Short Circuit (page 525)
alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Overload BOR
Comm object 1268
Description
This output is active when the BOR Overload (page 525) alarm is present in the alarmlist or isn’t confirm.
AL Overload Wrn
Comm object 1269
Description
This output is active when the Wrn Overload (page 512) alarm is present in alarmlist or isn’t confirm.

Alarm
Comm object 2
Description
The output is designed to be used as external alarm indication such as a red bulb in the control room etc. The
output is active when at least one unconfirmed alarm is present in the alarmlist and remains active until
confirmation of alarm.
AIN Switch01
Comm object 1400
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 1 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on the
adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 1 On (page 208) and Analog Switch 1 Off (page 208). The value is
measured from AIN SWITCH 01 (PAGE 484) analog input.

AIN Switch02
Comm object 1401
Description
AIN Switch03
Comm object 1402
Description

AIN Switch04
Comm object 1403
Description
6 Logical binary outputs alphabetically (page 435)
AIN Switch05
Comm object 1787
Description

AIN Switch06
Comm object 1788
Description
AIN Switch07
Comm object 1789
Description

AIN Switch08
Comm object 1790
Description
AIN Switch09
Comm object 1791
Description

AIN Switch10
Comm object 1792
Description
This is an output from the General Analog Input 10 switch function. The behavior of the switch depends on
the adjustment of the setpoints Analog Switch 10 On (page 226) and Analog Switch 10 Off (page 226). The
value is measured from AIN SWITCH 10 (PAGE 487) analog input.
AIN Switch11
Comm object 1793
Description

AIN Switch12
Comm object 1794
Description
AIN Switch13
Comm object 1795
Description

AIN Switch14
Comm object 1796
Description
AIN Switch15
Comm object 1797
Description

AIN Switch16
Comm object 1798
Description
AIN Switch17
Comm object 1799
Description

AIN Switch18
Comm object 1800
Description
AIN Switch19
Comm object 1801
Description

AIN Switch20
Comm object 1802
Description
LBO: B
BIN 1 Status
Comm object 1374
Description
This output is closed, when Binary Input 1 is active and open when Binary Input 1 is inactive. When Binary
Input 1 is used for BIN protection function then this output is closed when BIN protection alarm is in
Alarmlist.
Note: When LBI 1 is used like protection, then state of this LBO is connected with this protection e.g.
when LBI is inactive but alarm of protection is not confirm in alarmlist, LBO is still active.
Image 8.128 Binary Input 1 Status

BIN 2 Status
Comm object 1375
Description
Alarmlist.
BIN 3 Status
Comm object 1376
Description
Alarmlist.

BIN 4 Status
Comm object 1377
Description
Alarmlist.
BIN 5 Status
Comm object 1378
Description
Alarmlist.

BIN 6 Status
Comm object 1379
Description
Alarmlist.
BIN 7 Status
Comm object 1380
Description
Alarmlist.

BIN 8 Status
Comm object 1381
Description
Alarmlist.
BTB Close/Open
Comm object 45
Description
The output controls the bus circuit breaker. Its state represents the breaker position requested by the
controller. The breaker must react within 5 seconds to a close or open command, otherwise an alarm is
issued.
Image 8.136 BTB Close command

Image 8.137 Repeated BTB Close command
Image 8.138 BTB Open command

BTB OFF Coil
Comm object 47
Description
The output is intended for control of open coil of bus circuit breaker. The output gives a pulse in the moment
the breaker has to be opened. The pulse lasts until the feedback deactivates, but at least for 5 seconds.
Image 8.139 BTB OFF Coil command

BTB ON Coil
Comm object 46
Description
The output is intended for control of close coil of bus circuit breaker. The output gives at least 5 second pulse
in the moment the breaker has to be closed.
Image 8.140 BTB ON Coil close command
Image 8.141 Repeated BTB ON coil close command

BTB UV Coil
Comm object 48
Description
The output is intended for control of undervoltage coil of bus circuit breaker. The output is active the whole
time when the controller is switched on. The output is deactivated for at least 5 seconds in the moment the
breaker has to be switched off.
Image 8.142 BTB UV Coil close command
Image 8.143 BTB UV Coil open command

Bus Right Healthy
Comm object 77
Description
This output is active when the Bus Right voltage and frequency is within limits.
Bus Left Healthy

Comm object 78
Description
This output is active while Bus Left failure is not detected and Bus Left voltage and frequency is within limits.
LBO: E
Exercise Timer 1
Comm object 1250
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 1. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 249) subgroup. This output is
active when Timer 1 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 249) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 256).
Exercise Timer 2
Comm object 1251
Description
This is an output from the Exercise timer 2. This output makes it easy to make periodic tests of the gen-set
and its activation depends on the setpoints in the Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 256) subgroup. This output is
active when Timer 2 is active.
Note: In the event that both Timers are active at the same time, Subgroup: Timer 1 (page 249) has a
higher priority than Subgroup: Timer 2 (page 256).

LBO: F
Fault Reset
Comm object 592
Description
When the Fault Reset button is pressed the output is active for 1 s.
LBO: H
Heartbeat
Comm object 81
Description
This output toggles on/off in a period of 500 ms whenever the controller is switched on and functional.
Horn
Comm object 1
Description
The output designed to be used for acoustic indication of a newly appeared alarm. The output is activated
each time a new alarm has appeared and remains active until one of the following events occurs:
Fault reset is pressed
Horn reset is pressed

Horn Timeout (page 179) has elapsed
LBO: M
Mode AUTO
Comm object 19
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in AUTO mode.

Mode MAN
Comm object 18
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in MAN mode.
Mode OFF
Comm object 17
Description
This output is active whenever the controller is in OFF mode.
LBO: N
Not In AUTO
Comm object 1248
Description
This output is active when controller isn’t in AUTO mode.
Not Used
Comm object 286
Description
Output has no function.
LBO: S
Still Log 0
Comm object 26
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 0.

Still Log 1
Comm object 27
Description
Logical binary output which is still in logical 1.
Synchro
Comm object 69
Description
The output is active in case the synchronisation is active.
System Reserve OK
Comm object 87
Description
This LBO is active when System Reserve is higher than the actual reserve for start of next gen-sets.

8.1.5 Logical analog inputs
What Logical analog inputs are:
Logical analog inputs are inputs for analog values.
Note: Functions related to analog inputs are available only in case of configured analog extension module.
Alphabetical groups of Logical analog inputs

LAI: A 464
LAI: N 490
For full list of Logical analog inputs go to the chapter Logical analog inputs alphabetically (page 463).

Logical analog inputs alphabetically
AIN Prot01 464 AIN Switch 18 489

AIN Prot04 467 Bus Import Measurement 490
AIN Prot05 468 Not Used 490
AIN Prot06 469
AIN Prot07 470
AIN Prot08 471
AIN Prot09 472
AIN Prot10 473
AIN Prot11 474
AIN Prot12 475
AIN Prot13 476
AIN Prot14 477
AIN Prot15 478
AIN Prot16 479
AIN Prot17 480
AIN Prot18 481
AIN Prot19 482
AIN Prot20 483
AIN Switch 01 484
AIN Switch 02 484
AIN Switch 03 484
AIN Switch 04 485
AIN Switch 05 485
AIN Switch 06 485
AIN Switch 07 486
AIN Switch 08 486
AIN Switch 09 486
AIN Switch 10 487
AIN Switch 11 487
AIN Switch 12 487
AIN Switch 13 488
AIN Switch 14 488
AIN Switch 15 488
AIN Switch 16 489
AIN Switch 17 489

LAI: A
AIN Prot01
Comm object 9999
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. Limits for this protection are
adjusted by setpoints Analog Protection 1 Wrn (page 207) and Analog Protection 1 Sd (page 207). Delay is
adjusted by setpoint Analog Protection 1 Delay (page 207).
Protection types
Monitoring Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection.
HistRecOnl Analog value is only measured and displayed on the LCD screen but not used for
protection. History record is made if value is out of the limits.
AL Indic Analog value is not used for protection. Only alarmlist record is made if analog
value is out of the limits.
Wrn Analog value is used for warning protection only.
Wrn+Stp Analog value is used for warning and slow stop protection
Stp Analog value is used for slow stop protection
Wrn+BOR Analog value is used for warning and breaker open protection
BOR Analog value is used for breaker open protection
Note: This parameter has to be adjusted via InteliConfig.
Alarm
Under limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits
Over limit Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits
Under limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is under adjusted limits. If sensor fail
is detected then the alarm with higher level is activate as well.
Over limit + fls Alarm is activated when value of analog input is over adjusted limits. If sensor fail
Example: Protection type is Wrn + Sd. When sensor fail is detected then Sd alarm will be activated +
Sensor fail alarm will be activated.
6 back to Logical analog inputs alphabetically

AIN Prot02
Comm object 9998
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot03
Comm object 9997
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot04
Comm object 9996
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot05
Comm object 9995
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot06
Comm object 9994
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot07
Comm object 9993
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot08
Comm object 9992
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot09
Comm object 9991
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot10
Comm object 9990
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot11
Comm object 9989
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot12
Comm object 9988
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot13
Comm object 9987
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot14
Comm object 9986
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot15
Comm object 9985
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot16
Comm object 9984
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot17
Comm object 9983
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot18
Comm object 9982
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot19
Comm object 9981
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Prot20
Comm object 9980
Description
Protection types
protection.
Alarm

AIN Switch 01
Comm object 209
Description
Logical analog input designed for general value received from analog sensor. This analog input controls
logical binary output AIN SWITCH01 (PAGE 439). The behavior of the switch depends on the adjustment of
the setpoints Analog Switch 1 On (page 208) and Analog Switch 1 Off (page 208).
IMPORTANT: This analog input has no protection. Input is designed only to control
appropriate logical binary output.
AIN Switch 02
Comm object 210
Description
AIN Switch 03
Comm object 211
Description

AIN Switch 04
Comm object 212
Description
AIN Switch 05
Comm object 278
Description
AIN Switch 06
Comm object 279
Description

AIN Switch 07
Comm object 280
Description
AIN Switch 08
Comm object 281
Description
AIN Switch 09
Comm object 282
Description

AIN Switch 10
Comm object 283
Description
AIN Switch 11
Comm object 284
Description
AIN Switch 12
Comm object 285
Description

AIN Switch 13
Comm object 286
Description
AIN Switch 14
Comm object 287
Description
AIN Switch 15
Comm object 288
Description

AIN Switch 16
Comm object 289
Description
AIN Switch 17
Comm object 290
Description
AIN Switch 18
Comm object 291
Description

AIN Switch 19
Comm object 292
Description
AIN Switch 20
Comm object 293
Description
LAI: B
Bus Import Measurement
Comm object 5
Description
Value from this input is used for measurement of transferred bus power.
LAI: N
Not Used
Comm object 230
Description
Input has no function.

8.1.6 PLC
List of PLC groups
Group: Basic Logical functions 493
Group: Comparison of analog inputs 496
Group: Time functions 498
Group: Other functions 502
For full list of PLC blocks go to the chapter List of PLC blocks (page 492).

List of PLC blocks
Group: Basic logical

functions
OR/AND 493
XOR/RS 495
Group: Comparison of
analog inputs
Comparator With
Hysteresis 496
Comparator With Delay 497
Group: Time functions

Timer 498
Delay 500
Group: Other
functions
Force History Record 502
Force Protection 502

Group: Basic Logical functions
OR/AND
PLC group Basic logical functions
Related FW 2.0.0
Related applications AMF, MRS MINT, SPtM
Comm object 1
Inputs
Input Type Negation Range Function

Input 1..8 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1..8
Outputs
Output Type Negation Range Function

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block performs logical operation OR / AND of 2 - 8 binary operands. The inputs as well as the output can be
inverted.
Function OR
Input 1 Input 2 Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
Function AND
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
There have to be at least 2 inputs every time. There may be up to 8 inputs configured.

Image 8.144 Configuration of OR/AND block
6 back to List of PLC blocks

XOR/RS
PLC group Basic logical functions
Related FW 2.0.0
Comm object 2
Inputs

Input 1..2 Binary Yes 0/1 Inputs 1..2
Outputs

Output Binary Yes 0/1 Result of the logical operation
Description
The block provides logical function of two values - XOR or RS flip-flop. Both inputs and output can be
inverted.
Function XOR
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
Function RS
R S Qn+1
0 0 Qn
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 1 0
Image 8.145 Configuration of XOR/RS block

Group: Comparison of analog inputs
Comparator With Hysteresis
PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 2.0.0
Comm object 3
Inputs

Input Analog No Any Compared value
Input ON Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching on
Input OFF Analog No Same as Input Comparative level for switching off
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block compares the input value with the comparative levels. The behavior depends on whether the ON
level is higher than OFF level or vice versa.
Image 8.146 Different On and Off levels

Image 8.147 Configuration of Comp Hyst block
Note: Level On and Level Off can be constants or values from controller.
IMPORTANT: In case that values on inputs have different decimal numbers than the values
are converted and the name of block is red. It is strongly recommended to use values with
the same decimal numbers.
Comparator With Delay

PLC group Comparison of analog
inputs
Related FW 2.0.0
Comm object 4
Inputs

Input 1 Analog No Any Compared value
Input 2 Analog No Same as Input 1 Comparative level
Delay Analog No 0.0..3000,0 [s] Comparative delay
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Comparator output
Description
The block works as an analog switch. It compares the input value with the comparative level. The output will
switch on if the input is equal or higher than the comparative level for time longer than the delay.

Image 8.148 Principle of delay
Image 8.149 Configuration of Comp Time block
Note: Input 2 and Delay can be constants or values from controller.
Group: Time functions

Timer
PLC group Time functions
Related FW 2.0.0
Comm object 14
Inputs

The timer runs only if this input is
Run Binary No 0/1
active or not connected
This input reloads the timer to the
Reload Binary No 0/1
initial value
Reload
Analog No 0,0..3276,7 [s] Initial value of the timer
value
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Timer output
Description
The block works as a countdown timer which is decreased by 1 every PLC cycle. The timer initial value is
adjustable by the "Reload value" input. The timer is automatically reloaded with the initial value when it
reaches zero or it can be reloaded in any other moment using the "reload" input. The timer is held at reload
value until the reload input is deactivated. The timer output is inverted always when the timer is reloaded.
Image 8.150 Principle of timer
Image 8.151 Configuration of Timer block
Note: Input reload value can be constant or value from controller.
Note: If you want the output to start at logical 0, tick First down option. Otherwise the output will start at
logical 1.
IMPORTANT: In case that inputs are not connected and First down option isn´t tick, than
output is active.

Delay
PLC group Time functions
Related FW 2.0.0
Comm object 33
Inputs

Input Binary No 0/1 Input signal to be delayed
Delay of the rising edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200,0..3200,0 [s,
Analog No length generated by rising edge of the
up m, h]
input
Delay of the falling edge resp. pulse
Input time -3200,0..3200,0 [s,
Analog No length generated by falling edge of the
down m, h]
input
Resets the output to logical 0. The
output remains in logical 0 until new
Input reset Binary No 0/1
rising edge appears on Input (when
Input reset is deactivated already)
Outputs

Output Binary No 0/1 Output signal
Description
This block can work in two modes of operation:
Delay mode - the rising edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time up" when a rising
edge at the input is detected. The falling edge at the output is generated with delay of "input time
down" when a falling edge at the input is detected. If the delayed falling edge at the output came
earlier than the delayed rising edge, then no pulse would be generated at the output.
Pulse mode - a pulse of "input time up" length is generated at the output when a rising edge is
detected, a pulse of "input time down" length is generated at the output when a falling edge is
detected.

Image 8.152 Delay modes principles
Image 8.153 Configuration of Delay block
Note: If Input time up or Input time down value is <0, this input is internally set to zero.
Note: Input time up and Input time down values can be constants or values from controller.
Note: Use Pulse on edge option to choose between delay and pulse mode.

Group: Other functions
Force History Record
PLC group Other functions
Related FW 2.0.0
Comm object 9
Inputs

A record with configured text is
Input Binary No 0/1 recorded into the controller history
when the input is activated.
Outputs
No outputs.
Description
This block writes a record with defined text into the history when the input is activated.
Image 8.154 Configuration of Force Hist block
Note: Maximal number of characters for history message is 15.
Force Protection
PLC group Other functions
Related FW 2.0.0
Comm object 10
Inputs

The input activates yellow level of the
Lvl 1 Binary No 0/1
configured protection if it is configured
The input activates red level of the
Lvl 2 Binary No 0/1 configured protection if a red level
protection is configured
The input activates sensor fail if a fls
Fls Binary No 0/1
protection is configured

Outputs
No outputs.
Description
This block issues alarms of configured type and text when appropriate binary input is activated.
Image 8.155 Configuration of Force Prot block
Available protections are:

Monitoring
HistRecOnl
AL Indic
Wrn
Wrn+BOC
BOC
Wrn+Sd
Sd
Note: Maximal number of characters for alarmlist message is 15.
Note: Prefix of protection (e.g. Wrn, Sd, BOC) is added automatically into alarmlist message.

8.2 Alarms
8.2.3 Fail sensor and other types 531
What alarms are:

The controller evaluates two levels of alarms. For more information see Alarm management on page 103.
8.2.1 Alarms level 1

Warnings 506
Other type 513
For full list of Alarms level 1 go to List of alarms level 1 (page 505).
What alarms level 1 are:
The level 1 alarm indicates that a value or parameter is out of normal limits, but has still not reached critical
level. For more information see Alarm types - Level 1 on page 104.

List of alarms level 1
Alarm Email 1 Fail 506 Bus Right L3 Overvoltage 515 unexpected

Alarm Email 2 Fail 506 Bus Right L3 Module(slotB) - unknown
Alarm Email 3 Fail 506 Undervoltage 516 module 521
Alarm Email 4 Fail 506 Bus Right L3L1

Overvoltage 516
Alarm SMS 1 Fail 507
Bus Right L3L1
Undervoltage 516
Bus Right Overfrequency 517
Bus Right Underfrequency 517
Wrn Battery Voltage 508
Bus Right Voltage
Event Email 1 Fail 508
Unbalance 517
EM(A) - a message lost 517
EM(A) - configuration
Event Email 4 Fail 509 mistake 518
Event SMS 1 Fail 509 EM(A) - insufficient 518
Event SMS 2 Fail 509 EM(A) - missing or
Event SMS 3 Fail 509 damaged 518
Event SMS 4 Fail 510 EM(B) - a message lost 518
Bus CCW Rotation 510 EM(B) - configuration
Bus Left CCW Rotation 510 mistake 519
Wrn AIN Prot 510 EM(B) - insufficient 519
Wrn BadPwrCfg 511 EM(B) - missing or

damaged 519
Wrn BIN Protection 511
Module(slotA) - comm.
Wrn BTB Fail 511
outage 519
Wrn Overload 512
Module(slotA) - false
Bus Right L1 Overvoltage 513
module 519
Bus Right L1
Module(slotA) -
Undervoltage 513
unattended 520
Bus Right L1L2
Module(slotA) -
Overvoltage 513
unexpected 520
Bus Right L1L2
Module(slotA) - unknown
Undervoltage 514
module 520
Bus Right L2 Overvoltage 514
Module(slotB) - comm.
Bus Right L2 outage 520
Undervoltage 514
Module(slotB) - false
Bus Right L2L3 module 521
Overvoltage 515
Module(slotB) -
Bus Right L2L3 unattended 521
Undervoltage 515
Module(slotB) - 521

Warnings
Alarm Email 1 Fail
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm Email 1 Fail
Alarm evaluated All the time
Related applications MCB, MGCB, BTB
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm email to email
Description address which is adjusted in setpoint Email Address 1 (page 284) and email wasn’t
send.
6 back to List of alarms level 1
Alarm Email 2 Fail

Alarm Type Other
send.
Alarm Email 3 Fail

Alarm Type Other
send.
Alarm Email 4 Fail

Alarm Type Other
send.

Alarm SMS 1 Fail
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Alarm SMS 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an alarm SMS to telephone
Description number which is adjusted in setpoint Telephone Number 1 (page 281) and SMS
wasn’t send.
Alarm SMS 2 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.
Alarm SMS 3 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.
Alarm SMS 4 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.

Wrn Battery Voltage
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Battery Voltage
This alarm informs the operator that the controller supply voltage is out of limits.
The following setpoints are related to it:
Description Battery Undervoltage (page 180)

Battery Overvoltage (page 180)
Battery <> Voltage Delay (page 181)
Event Email 1 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event Email 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event email to email
send.
Event Email 2 Fail

Alarm Type Other
send.
Event Email 3 Fail

Alarm Type Other
send.

Event Email 4 Fail
Alarm Type Other
send.
Event SMS 1 Fail

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Event SMS 1 Fail
The alarm indicates that there was a request to send an event SMS to telephone
wasn’t send.
Event SMS 2 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.
Event SMS 3 Fail

Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.

Event SMS 4 Fail
Alarm Type Other
wasn’t send.
Bus CCW Rotation

Alarm Type Alarm indication
Alarmlist message Bus CCW Rotation
Related applications MCB, MGCB
The controller detects phase sequence on bus voltage terminals. This protection is
important after controller installation to avoid wrong voltage phase connection.
Description There is a fixed defined phase sequence in InteliMains 210 controller: T35 = N, T36
= L1, T37 = L2 and T38 = L3. When the phases are connected in a different order,
alarms are detected. This alarm prevent circuit breaker closing.
Bus Left CCW Rotation

Alarm Type Alarm indication
Alarmlist message Bus Left CCW Rotation
The controller detects phase sequence on Bus Left voltage terminals. This
Description protection is important after controller installation to avoid wrong voltage phase
connection.
Wrn AIN Prot

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn + Name of analog input
This alarm indicates that value the general analog protection is out of warning
Description
protection limit.

Wrn BadPwrCfg
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn BadPwrCfg
This alarm is issued when there is different power format on controller which are
Description
connected via CAN2.
Wrn BIN Protection

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn + Name of binary input
Binary input also can be adjusted like alarm. In this case message in alarmlist
Description contains prefix - Wrn and binary input name. This alarm occurs, when appropriate
binary input is active.
Wrn BTB Fail

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn MCB Fail
This alarm will occur when the BTB FEEDBACK (PAGE 427) input does not match
the expected position given by the BTB CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 453) output. It stays
active until the mismatch between the output and feedback disappears.
If there was no command issued by the controller and the breaker
(feedback) changes suddenly the position itself, the alarm will be issued
Description
immediately.
The alarm will be also issued, if the breaker does not respond to the close
command within 2 seconds. After this period has elapsed the output BTB
CLOSE/OPEN (PAGE 453) is deactivated again and the next attempt to close
the breaker will occur first after the alarm is reset.

Wrn Overload
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Wrn Overload
The alarm is issued when the Bus Left power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The following setpoints are related to it:
Description
Overload Wrn (page 185) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 185) Overload Del adjusts the delay.
Synchronization Fail
Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Synchronization Fail
Alarm evaluated During synchronization
This alarm is issued when bus left is synchronizing to the bus right or vice versa,
Description
via BTB and Synchronization Timeout (page 204) gets elapsed.
Bus Measurement Error

Alarm Type Warning
Alarmlist message Bus Measurement Error
The alarm is issued when the voltage on the bus is out of limits for 20 seconds
under these conditions:
MCB application:
MCB is closed in AUTO mode
Any GCB in the same control group was closed
MGCB application:
Description
MCB and MGCB are closed in AUTO mode
Any GCB in the same control group was closed. MGCB closing is blocked
BTB application:
BTB feedback was closed in AUTO mode
Any GCB in power management group (on CAN bus) was closed.
BTB closing is blocked

Other type
Bus Right L1 Overvoltage
Alarm Type History record
Alarmlist message No
This alarm evaluates the Bus Right phase voltage in phases. The following
setpoints are related to it:
Bus Right Overvoltage (page 182)
Description
Bus Right < > Voltage Delay (page 183)
Note: Alarm is active only in case the setpoint Connection type (page 176) is
set to 3Ph4Wire or MonoPhase.
Bus Right L1 Undervoltage

Bus Right Undervoltage (page 183)
Description
Bus Right L1L2 Overvoltage

This alarm evaluates the Bus Right voltage between phases L1 a L2. The following
Description
set to 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D.

Bus Right L1L2 Undervoltage
Description

Description
set to 3Ph4Wire.

Description
set to 3Ph4Wire.

Description

Description

Description
set to 3Ph4Wire.

Description
set to 3Ph4Wire.

Description
set to 3Ph3Wire or High Leg D or SplitPhase.

Description

Bus Right Overfrequency
This alarm evaluates the Bus Right frequency. The following setpoints are related
to it:
Description
Bus Right Overfrequency (page 184)
Bus Right < > Frequency Delay (page 184)
Bus Right Underfrequency

This alarm evaluates the Bus Right frequency. The following setpoints are related
to it:
Description
Bus Right Underfrequency (page 184)
Bus Right < > Frequency Delay (page 184)
Bus Right Voltage Unbalance

This alarm evaluates the Bus Right phase voltage unbalance. The following
Description
Bus Right Voltage Unbalance (page 183)
Bus Right Voltage Unbalance Delay (page 183)
EM(A) - a message lost

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - a message lost
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication between controller
Description
and module in slot.

EM(A) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - configuration mistake
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.
EM(A) - insufficient
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - insufficient
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.
EM(A) - missing or damaged

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(A) - missing or damaged
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in slot
Description
(in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in slot).
EM(B) - a message lost

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(B) - a message lost
Description
and module in slot.

EM(B) - configuration mistake
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(B) - configuration mistake
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with configuration of binary input or
Description
output of module in slot.
EM(B) - insufficient
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(B) - insufficient
Description This alarm indicates that module does not support all required features.
EM(B) - missing or damaged

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message EM(B) - missing or damaged
This alarm indicates that there is a problem with communication with module in slot
Description
(in first 5 second there was no communication and module is configured in slot).
Module(slotA) - comm. outage

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - comm. outage
Description
and module in slot.
Module(slotA) - false module

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - fake module
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.

Module(slotA) - unattended
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unattended
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.
Module(slotA) - unexpected
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unexpected
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.
Module(slotA) - unknown module

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotA) - unknown module
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.
Module(slotB) - comm. outage

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - comm. outage
Description
and module in slot.

Module(slotB) - false module
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - fake module
Description This alarm indicates that false module is inserted in slot.
Module(slotB) - unattended
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unattended
This alarm indicates that two same communication modules are inserted in slots
Description
and one of them will be inactive.
Module(slotB) - unexpected
Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unexpected
This alarm indicates that in slot is inserted different module than which is
Description configured or the module is unconfigured and has to be configured for proper
function.
Module(slotB) - unknown module

Alarm Type Other
Alarmlist message Module(slotB) - unknown module
Description This alarm indicates that unknown module is inserted in slot.

8.2.2 Alarms level 2
Other type 524
For full list of Alarms level 2 go to List of alarms level 2 (page 523).
What alarms level 2 are:
The level 2 level alarm indicates that a critical level of the respective value or parameter has been reached. For
more information see Alarm types - Level 2 on page 104.

List of alarms level 2
Synchronization Fail 512

Bus Measurement Error 512
BOR AIN Prot 524
BOR BIN Protection 524
Current Unbalance 524
BOR Overcurrent IDMT 524
BOR Overload 525
MPR Short Circuit 525
Bus Left L1 Overvoltage 525
Bus Left L1 Undervoltage 526
Bus Left L1L2 Overvoltage526
Bus Left L1L2
Undervoltage 526
Bus Left L2L3
Undervoltage 528
Bus Left L3L1
Undervoltage 529
Bus Left Voltage
Unbalance 530

Other type
BOR AIN Prot
Alarm Type BOR
Alarmlist message BOR + Name of analog input
This alarm indicates that the value of general analog protection is out of BOR
Description
protection limit.
BOR BIN Protection

Alarm Type BOR
Alarmlist message BOR + Name of binary input
Binary input also can be adjusted like alarm. In this case message in alarmlist
Description contains prefix - BOR and binary input name. This alarm occurs, when appropriate
binary input is active.
Current Unbalance
Alarm Type BOR
Alarmlist message BOR Current Unbalance
This alarm evaluates the unbalance of the phase currents, i.e. the difference
between highest and lowest phase current at any given time. The following
Description
Current Unbalance (page 188) adjusts the maximum allowed difference
between the highest and lowest phase current at any given time.
Current Unbalance Delay (page 188) adjusts the alarm delay.
BOR Overcurrent IDMT

Alarm Type BOR
Alarmlist message BOR Overcurrent IDMT

Related applications MCB, MGCB. BTB
The overcurrent alarm is based on IDMT principle. The reaction time of an IDMT
alarm is not fixed, but depends on how much is the protected value above the limit
(Nominal Current (page 175)). The higher is the overcurrent, the shorter the reaction
time will be. All mains phases are evaluated.
Description The behavior of the overcurrent alarm is adjusted by the following setpoints:
IDMT Overcurrent (page 187) defines the reaction time of the protection
when the current is twice the amount of nominal value.
Nominal Current (page 175) set the nominal current level, where the alarm
starts to be evaluated. The reaction time is infinite at this point.
BOR Overload
Alarm Type BOR
Alarmlist message BOR Overload
The alarm is issued when the Bus Left power is over the limit for time period longer
than the delay. The behavior of the overload alarm is adjusted by the following
Description setpoints:
Overload BOR (page 185) adjusts the overload limit.
Overload Delay (page 185) adjusts the delay
MPR Short Circuit

Alarm Type Mains protect
Alarmlist message MPR Short Circuit
This is a fast overcurrent protection. The following setpoints are related to this
alarm:
Description
Short Circuit BOR (page 186) adjusts the short current limit
Short Circuit BOR Delay (page 186) adjusts the delay in fine steps
Bus Left L1 Overvoltage

Alarm Type Breaker open

This alarm evaluates the Bus Left phase voltage in phases. The following setpoints
are related to it:
Bus Left Overvoltage (page 188)
Description
Bus Left < > Voltage Delay (page 189)
Bus Left L1 Undervoltage

are related to it:
Bus Left Undervoltage (page 188)
Description
Bus Left L1L2 Overvoltage

This alarm evaluates the Bus Left voltage between phases L1 a L2. The following
Description
Bus Left L1L2 Undervoltage


Description

are related to it:
Description
set to 3Ph4Wire.

are related to it:
Description
set to 3Ph4Wire.


Description

Description

are related to it:
Description
set to 3Ph4Wire.


are related to it:
Description
set to 3Ph4Wire.

Description

Description


This alarm evaluates the Bus Left phase voltage in phases 1. The following
Description

This alarm evaluates the Bus Left phase voltage in phases 1. The following
Description
Bus Left Voltage Unbalance

This alarm evaluates the Bus Left voltage unbalance. The following setpoints are
related to it:
Description
Bus Left Voltage Unbalance (page 189)
Bus Left Voltage Unbalance Delay (page 189)

8.2.3 Fail sensor and other types
Fls AIN Prot 1 533
Fls AIN Protect 2 533
For full list of Fails sensor and other types of alarms go to List of fail sensor alarms (page 531).
What Fail sensor and other types of alarms are
If the measured resistance on an analog input exceeds the valid range, a sensor fail will be detected and a
sensor fail message will appear in the Alarmlist. For more information see Sensor fail detection (FLS) on
page 105.
Note: Functions related to analog inputs are available only in case of configured analog extension module.
List of fail sensor alarms

Fls AIN Prot 1 533


Fail sensor
Fls AIN Prot 1
Alarm Type Fls
Alarmlist message Fls + name of analog input 1
This alarm indicates that the value of general analog protection is out of range or is
Description
missing.
6 back to List of fail sensor alarms
Fls AIN Protect 2

Alarm Type Fls
This alarm occurs when measurement value of analog input 2 is out of range or is
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 3

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 4

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.

Fls AIN Protect 5
Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 6

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 7

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 8

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.

Fls AIN Protect 9
Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 10

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 11

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 12

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.

Fls AIN Protect 13
Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 14

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 15

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 16

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.

Fls AIN Protect 17
Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 18

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 19

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.
Fls AIN Protect 20

Alarm Type Fls
Description
missing.

8.3 Modules
8.3.1 Plug-In modules 538
8.3.2 CAN modules 553
8.3.1 Plug-In modules

Communication modules 538
Extension modules 551
IMPORTANT: 2nd generation of InteliMains 210 controllers does not support new modules and 3rd
generation does not support all old modules.
The available communication plug-in modules are:

CM-RS232-485 - communication module for connection via RS232 or RS485 line
CM-4G-GPS - communication module for connection via 4G
CM-GPRS - communication module for connection via GPRS
CM-Ethernet - communication module for internet connection via Ethernet
The available extension plug-in modules are:
EM-BIO8-EFCP - extension module with 8 binary inputs/outputs and with earth fault current protection
Note: Controller has 12 plug-in module slots.
Supported combinations of plug-in modules

Module CM-Ethernet CM-4G-GPS CM-GPRS CM-RS232-485 EM-BIO8-EFCP
CM-Ethernet
CM-4G-GPS
CM-GPRS
CM-RS232-485
EM-BIO8-EFCP
Communication modules
CM-RS232-485 539
CM-Ethernet 541
CM-GPRS 542
CM-4G-GPS 546

CM-RS232-485
CM-RS232-485 is optional plug-in card to enable InteliMains 210 the RS232 and RS485 communication. This is
required for computer or MODBUS connection. The CM-RS232-485 is a dual port module with RS232 and
RS485 interfaces at independent COM channels. The RS232 is connected to COM1 and RS485 to COM2.
Image 8.156 CM-RS232-485 interface
IMPORTANT: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power
supply to controller.
Image 8.157 Pinout of RS-232 line

Image 8.158 Pinout of RS-485 line
Image 8.159 Jumpers description
Note: Balancing resistors shall be both closed at only one device in whole RS485 network.
Maximal distance of line is 10m for RS232 line and 1200m for RS485 line.
Terminator 120Ω
Balancing resistor +5V
Technical data
40 mA / 8 VDC
26 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
14 mA / 24 VDC
10 mA / 36 VDC
Isolation Galvanic separation
Firmware upgrade
Download the newest FW of module from ComAp website (in form of PSI file or installation package)
Instal package to computer or open PSI to instal it into InteliConfig
Plug the module into the controller and power the controller on.
Open a connection with controller via InteliConfig

Go the menu Tools -> Firmware upgrade, select the Plug-in modules tab and select the appropriate firmware
you want to program into the module (in InteliConfig).
Press the OK button to start upgrade of firmware.
The firmware update process may be performed via any kind of connection including connection via the same
module in which the firmware is to be updated. The connection is reestablished again automatically when the
update process is finished.
CM-Ethernet
CM-Ethernet is a plug-in card with Ethernet 10/100 Mbit interface in RJ45 connector. It provides an interface for
connecting a PC with through ethernet/internet network, for sending active e-mails and for integration of the
controller into a building management (MODBUS TCP and SNMP protocols). This card also enables to monitor
and control the gen-set over web browser from any location with internet access using appropriate security
measures.
Image 8.160 CM-Ethernet interface
Use an Ethernet UTP cable with a RJ45 connector for linking the module with your Ethernet network. The
module can also be connected directly to a PC using cross-wired UTP cable.
Image 8.161 Cross-wired cable

Technical data
120 mA / 8 VDC
82 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
35 mA / 24 VDC
25 mA / 36 VDC
Module setup
All settings related to the module are to be adjusted via the controller setpoints. The respective setpoints are
located in the setpoint Group: CM-Ethernet (page 284).
All actual operational values like actual IP address etc. are available in controller values in a specific group as
well.
On module is also indication LED. Following states are indicated via this LED:
bootloader mode with communication with controller - green LED is blinking in period 50ms/50ms
bootloader mode without communication with controller - red LED is blinking in period 50ms/50ms
operating mode with communication with controller - green LED is blinking in period 500ms/500ms
operating mode without communication with controller - red LED is blinking in period 500ms/500ms
test mode - green LED is blinking in period 250ms/250ms
Firmware upgrade
CM-GPRS
CM-GPRS plug-in module is a GSM/GPRS modem which can works in two modes of operation based on the
settings in the setpoint Mode (page 274).

Image 8.162 CM-GPRS module
IMPORTANT: CM-4G-GPS and CM-GPRS modules can't be used in one controller in the same time.
Note: GPRS and CSD services must be provided by your GSM/GPRS operator for successful operation.
Note: The GPRS and CSD connection should not be used for the firmware update process.
CM-GPRS module works with:

WebSupervisor – internet-based remote monitoring solution
AirGate – powerful connection technology to make internet access as simple as possible
Technical data
32 mA / 8 VDC
18 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
10 mA / 24 VDC
12 mA / 36 VDC
SIM card settings

SIM card to be used in CM-4G-GPS or CM-GPRS modules must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled
How to start using CM-GPRS module

You will need a controller, CM-GPRS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data service.
Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. I.e. if you want to use the
module in GPRS (2,5G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card does support
2,5G network.
Contact your mobile operator for getting packet data APN (APN = Access Point Name), username and
password.
Example: APN Name = "internet", UserName = [blank], Password = [blank].

Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM-GPRS card
Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.
Switch off the controller.
Insert CM-GPRS module into controller
Power up the controller.
Select the mode of CM-GPRS module by adjusting setpoint Mode.
Enter correct APN Name, APN User Name and APN User Password in controller’s setpoint group CM-
GPRS which is accessible by PAGE button from any measurement screen on controller. Setpoints can be
set on controller’s front panel keyboard or by InteliConfig.
Switch the controller off and on.
Wait for approx 2 - 4 minutes for first connection of the system to AirGate. AirGate will generate
automatically the AirGate ID value. Then navigate to measurement screens where you will find signal
strength bar and AirGate ID identifier.
Image 8.163 Main screen of CM-GPRS module
Image 8.164 Screen of AirGate
GSM Diag Code – Diagnostic code for CM-GPRS modem

Code Description
0 OK. No error.
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or unknown
11
status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by locked
14
SIM card
15 Unknown modem
19 No CDMA network
25 PUK is required

43 APN not typed
AirGate Diag – Diagnostic Code for AirGate connection
Code Description
0 Waiting for connection to AirGate Server
Firmware upgrade
CM-4G-GPS
CM-4G-GPS plug-in module containing a GPS receiver and GSM/WCDMA/LTE modem which can works in
two modes of operation based on the settings in the setpoint Mode (page 274).

Image 8.165 CM-4G-GPS module
IMPORTANT: CM-4G-GPS and CM-GPRS modules cant be used in one controller in the same time.
IMPORTANT: Operating temperature of module is from -30°C to +75°C.
Note: Cellular data service must be enabled in your SIM card by your mobile operator for successful operation.
CM-4G-GPS module works with:

WebSupervisor – internet-based remote monitoring solution
AirGate – powerful connection technology to make internet access as simple as possible
Locate – Celluar network based localization service
CM-4G-GPS module also works like GPS locator. Geo-fencing function can be used with this module.
Supported 4G bands are as follows:
FDD LTE: Band 1, Band 2, Band 3, Band 4, Band 5, Band 7, Band 8, Band 20, all bands with diversity
WCDMA/HSDPA/HSUPA/HSPA+: Band 1, Band 2, Band 5, Band 8, all bands with diversity
GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz/1900 MHz
Technical data
55 mA / 8 VDC
35 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
8 mA / 24 VDC
5 mA / 36 VDC
SIM card settings

SIM card to be used in CM-4G-GPS or CM-GPRS modules must be adjusted as follows:
SMS service enabled
Packet data (Internet access) enabled (when required for the selected mode of operation)
PIN code security disabled
How to start using CM-4G-GPS module

You will need a controller, CM-4G-GPS module, antenna and SIM card with SMS and packet data service.

Note: Make sure that your SIM supports the packet data network type you want to use. - i.e. if you want to use
the module in LTE (4G) network you have to confirm with the operator that the particular SIM card supports 4G
network.
Contact your mobile operator for getting packet data APN (APN = Access Point Name), username and
password.
Example: APN Name = "internet", UserName = [blank], Password = [blank].
Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. Use any mobile phone to switch the SIM PIN security off.
Place the SIM card into slot on CM-4G-GPS card
Connect the antenna to Cellular module antenna connector.
If you want to use the built-in GPS receiver connect also an active GPS antenna to the GPS antenna
connector.
Switch off the controller.
Insert CM-4G-GPS module into controller
Power up the controller.
Select the mode of CM-4G-GPS module by adjusting setpoint Mode.
Enter correct APN Name, APN User Name and APN User Password in controller’s setpoint group CM-4G-
GPS which is accessible by PAGE button from any measurement screen on controller. Setpoints can be set
on controller’s front panel keyboard or by InteliConfig.
Switch the controller off and on.
Wait for approx 2 - 4 minutes for first connection of the system to AirGate. AirGate will generate
automatically the AirGate ID value. Then navigate to measurement screens where you will find signal
strength bar and AirGate ID identifier.
Image 8.166 Main screen of CM-4G-GPS module

Image 8.167 Screen of AirGate
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or unknown
11
status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by locked
14
SIM card
15 Unknown modem
19 No CDMA network

25 PUK is required
43 APN not typed
AirGate Diag – Diagnostic Code for AirGate connection
Code Description
0 Waiting for connection to AirGate Server
Firmware upgrade

Extension modules
EM-BIO8-EFCP 551
EM-BIO8-EFCP
EM-BIO8-EFCP is optional plug-in card. Through this card controller can accommodate one AC current (CT)
measuring input (1A or 5A input) and up to 8 binary inputs or outputs. In InteliConfig PC configuration tool it is
possible to easily choose if particular I/O will be binary input or output.
Image 8.168 EM-BIO8-EFCP interface
IMPORTANT: Earth fault current measurement is supported by controller only in slot A.

Image 8.169 Overview of EM-BIO8-EFCP
Note: Current inputs are supported only in MRS16 and AMF25 controllers.
Image 8.170 EM-BIO8-EFCP wiring
Note: Current inputs are supported only in MRS16 and AMF25 controllers.
EM-BIO8-EFCP technical data

Power supply
Power supply range 8-36 VDC
40 mA / 8 VDC
27 mA / 12 VDC
Power consumption
22 mA / 24 VDC
19 mA / 36 VDC

Binary inputs
Number Up to 8, non-isolated
0-2 VDC close contact
Close/Open indication
>6 VDC open contact
Binary outputs
Number Up to 8 , non-isolated
Max. current 0,5A
Switching to positive supply terminal
Current measuring input

Number of inputs 2
Nominal input current 1A/5A
Load (CT output impedance) < 0,1
Max measured current from CT 10 A
Current measurement
2% from Nominal current
tolerance
Max peak current from CT 150 A / 1 s
Max continuous current 10 A
Firmware upgrade
8.3.2 CAN modules

Extension modules 554
The available extension CAN modules are:

Inteli AIN8 - extension CAN module with 8 analog inputs
Inteli IO8/8 - extension CAN module with 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
this CAN module can be switched to Inteli IO16/0 - extension CAN module with 16 binary inputs and 2
analog outputs

Supported combinations of modules
Slot Inteli AIN8 Inteli AIN8TC Inteli IO8/8 Inteli IO16/0 IGL-RA15 IGS-PTM Inteli AIO9/1
IMPORTANT: In slot 3, 4 and 5 CAN modules Inteli IO8/8 and Inteli IO16/0 are supported without
analog outputs. Analog outputs of these CAN modules are supported only in slot 1 and 2.
It is possible to add up to 80 binary inputs or up to 68 binary outputs or up to 32 analog inputs on CAN modules.
Extension modules
Inteli AIN8 554
Inteli IO8/8 560
IGS-PTM 567
Inteli AIN8
Inteli AIN8 module is extension module equipped with analog inputs. Inteli AIN8 module is connected to
controller by CAN1 bus.
Image 8.171 Inteli AIN8

Image 8.172 Inteli AIN8 dimensions
Note: All dimensions are in mm.
Terminals
Analog input 8 analog Inputs

CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
CAN LED Tx, Rx Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position “ON” - switch both switches)

Note: Impulse input is not supported.
Analog inputs
8 channels
can be configured as:
resistor three wire input
current input
voltage input
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
IMPORTANT: Impulse input is not supported in controller.
Supported sensors
Sensors
User curves NI100 [°F] (fix) 0-5V
PT100 [°C] (fix) NI1000 [°F] (fix) 0-10V
PT1000 [°C] (fix) 4-20mA passive
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-2400ohm 4-20mA active
NI1000 [°C] (fix) 0-10k ohm 0-20mA passive
PT100 [°F] (fix) +-1V +-20mA active
PT1000 [°F] (fix) 0-2.4V
CAN address
DIP switch determinates CAN address for analog inputs.
Note: In case of setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.
Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Separate the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on a pins

4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv
5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli AIN8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn’t start – after 60 second the “Timeout” will be evaluated. In this
case please check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply
11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded
LED indication
LED status Description
Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli AIN8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn’t communicate with the controller).
Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of sensors.

Terminator
Resistance sensor - 3 wires
Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω, 0 – 10 kΩ
Resistance sensor - 2 wires
Note: Ranges: Pt100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000, 0 – 2400 Ω, 0 – 10 kΩ
Current sensor - active
Note: Ranges: ±20 mA, 4 – 20 mA

Current sensor - passive
Note: Ranges: 0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA
Voltage sensor
Note: Ranges: ±1 V, 0 – 2,5 V, 0 – 5 V, 0 – 10 V
Technical data
General data
Power supply 8 to 36 V DC
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Interface to controller CAN1
Protection IP20
Storage temperature - 40 °C to + 80 °C
Operating temperature - 30 °C to + 70 °C
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110x110x46 mm (4,3”x4,3”x1,8”)
Weight 221,5 grams
Analog inputs
Number of channels 8
Range 0-10 V
Voltage
Accuracy: ± 0,25 % of actual value + ± 25 mV
Current Range: ±20 mA

Accuracy: ± 0,25 % of actual value + ± 50 µA
Range: 0- 10 kΩ
Resistive
Accuracy: ± 0,5 % of actual value + ± 2 Ω
Inteli IO8/8
Inteli IO8/8 module is an extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs and analog outputs.
Inteli IO8/8 is the name of the module, but it is possible to configure the module (by internal switch) to two
configurations:
Inteli IO8/8 - 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
Inteli IO16/0 - 16 binary inputs, 0 binary outputs and 2 analog outputs
The detection of communication speed is indicated by fast flashing of status LED. Once the speed is detected
the module remains set for the speed even when the communication is lost. Renewal of communication speed
detection is done by reset of the module.
Image 8.173 Inteli IO8/8

Image 8.174 Inteli IO8/8 dimensions
Note: All dimensions are in mm.
Terminals
Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Binary outputs 8 binary outputs (8 binary inputs)
Analog outputs 2 analog outputs
CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
Binary inputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary input indication

Binary outputs LEDs 8 LEDs for binary output indication
CAN LED Indication transmitted or received data
Status LED indication of correct function
CAN terminator Terminating CAN resistor (active in position “ON” - switch both switches)
Inputs and outputs

Binary inputs
8 channels
pull up
pull down
All 8 inputs are configured to one type together.
All inputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Binary outputs
8 channels
High side switch
Low side switch
Always all 8 inputs are configured to one type (HSS/LSS) together. All 8 outputs can be modified to inputs by
switch on the PCB ( Inteli IO8/8 to Inteli IO16/0).
Analog outputs
2 channels
voltage 0-10V
current 0-20mA
PWM (level 5V, with adjustable frequency from 200Hz to 2400Hz, with step 1Hz)
All inputs/outputs can be configured to any logical function or protection.
Output state check

Output state check function evaluates in real time the state of binary outputs and adjusted (required) state. In
case of failure (different state of required state and real state) history record and alarm are issued (type of the
alarm is set by “Protection upon module failure” - (No protection / Warning / Shutdown)).
This function is designed for short-circuit or other failure, which causes change of set state of binary output.
CAN address
In Inteli IO8/8 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, CAN address for binary
output and analog outputs is determined by DIP switch B.
In Inteli IO16/0 mode CAN address for binary inputs is determined by DIP switch A, first group of 8 input has
address A, second group of 8 inputs has address A+1. CAN address of analog outputs is set by DIP switch B.

Note: In case of setting the CAN address to zero, the appropriate group of signals is deactivated.
Programming firmware
Firmware upgrade process:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the unit.
2. Separate the top cover of module
3. Put the TEST jumper on a pins
4. Connect the unit with PC via RS232-null modem cable and AT-Link conv
5. Connect power supply of the module (status LED lights continuously)

6. Launch FlashPgr.exe PC software (version 4.2 or higher)
7. In FlashPrg program choose card Inteli IO8/8 and load FW for the module
8. Set the proper COM port (connected with the unit) and press Start button
9. Wait till process is done (If the process doesn’t start – after 60 second the “Timeout” will be evaluated. In this
case please check:
You have proper connection with the unit
COM port selection is correct
Module has power supply, (no CAN bus connection, status LED lights continuously)
10. After successful programming disconnect AT-Link conv , remove TEST jumper and disconnect power
supply

11. Connect power supply again (status LED should blinking)
12. Module FW is upgraded
LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary output is
set. When this LED is shining, then module is configured as 8 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs. When this
LED is dark, then the module is configured as 16 binary inputs.
LED at power connector - status LED
Dark Fw in module does not work correctly.
Flashing Module does not communicate with controller (in case non-zero CAN address).
Power supply is in the range and the communication between Inteli IO8/8 and controller
works properly.
Lights
Or power supply is in range and zero CAN address is set. (in case zero CAN address
module doesn’t communicate with the controller).
Wiring
The following diagrams show the correct connection of inputs and outputs.
Binary inputs - pull up
There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see case when binary input is connected between
BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the GND (-) - dashed line).
On lower picture is case of wiring between BIN2 and GND (-). Both ways are correct.

Binary inputs - pull down
There are two options of wiring. On upper picture you can see case when binary input is connected between
BIN2 and COM (COM is connected internally to the Ucc (+) - dashed line).
On lower picture is case of wiring between BIN2 and Ucc (+). Both ways are correct.
Binary outputs - high side
When high side setting of outputs is chosen - binary output must be connected to the minus potential directly
Terminal VHS (voltage High side) has to be connected to positive potential directly. Maximal current of each
binary output is 500 mA. Size of fuse depends on load.
Binary outputs - low side
When low side setting of outputs is chosen - binary output must be connected to the plus potential of power
supply directly. Minus potential is connected internally - dashed line.
Analog outputs

Note: Limit of analog ground (AGND) is 100mA.
IMPORTANT: Terminator for analog output has special analog ground (AGND), which must not be
connected to the GND.
Technical data
General data
Current consumption 35 mA at 24 V ÷ 100 mA at 8 V
Protection IP20
Dimensions (WxHxD) 110x110x46 mm (4,3”x4,3”x1,8”)
Weight 240 grams
Analog outputs
Range 0-10 V
Voltage Accuracy: ± 20 mV + ±0,5 % of actual value
Imax 5 mA
Range: 0-20 mA
Current Accuracy: ± 100 µA + ±0,5 % of actual value
Rmax 500 Ω
Level 5 V
PWM Frequency - adjustable 200÷2400 Hz
Imax 20 mA
Binary inputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 16 for Inteli IO16/0
Input resistance 4400 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for close contact indication 6 to 36 V DC
Binary outputs
Number of channels 8 for Inteli IO8/8, 0 for Inteli IO16/0
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC

IGS-PTM
IGS-PTM module is extension module equipped with binary inputs, binary outputs, analog inputs and analog
output. IGS-PTM module is connected to controller by CAN1 bus.
Image 8.175 IGS-PTM
Image 8.176 IGS-PTM dimensions

Terminals
Binary inputs 8 binary inputs

Analog inputs 4 analog inputs
Analog outputs 1 analog output
Binary outputs 8 binary outputs
CAN CAN1 line
RS232-TTL Interface for programming
Power Power supply
Analog inputs
Analog inputs can be configured for:
Resistance measurement
Current measurement
Voltage measurement
The type of analog inputs is configured via jumpers RUI located on lower PCB.
RUI Analog input configuration

1-2 Resistance measuring
2-3 Current measuring
no jumper Voltage measuring
Supported sensors
Sensors
PT100 [°C] (fix) User curves
NI100 [°C] (fix) 0-100 mV
PT100 [°F] (fix) 0-2400 ohm
NI100 [°F] (fix) ±20 mA

CAN address
Controller type selection
The type of controller to be used with IGS-PTM must be selected via jumper labeled IGS accessible at the lower
PCB.
IGS jumper Controller type

OPEN IL-NT, IC-NT
CLOSE IG-NT, IS-NT, InteliGen
Address configuration
If InteliGen controller type is selected (by IGS jumper), address of IGS-PTM could be modified via jumpers
labeled ADR1 and ADR2.
ADR1 ADR2 ADR offset BIN module BOUT module AIN module
Open Open 0 (default) 1 1 1
Close Open 1 2 2 2
Open Close 2 3 3 3
Close Close 3 4 4 4
Programing firmware
Firmware upgrade is via AT-link (TTL). For programming is necessary to close jumper BOOT. RESET jumper is
used to reset the device. Close jumper to reset the device. For programming is used FlashProg PC tool.
LED indication
Binary input
Each binary input has LED which indicates input signal. LED is shining when input signal is set, and LED is
dark while input signal has other state.
Binary output
Each binary output has LED which indicates output signal. Binary output LED is shining when binary output is
set.
LED at power connector - status LED
Dark No required power connected.
Quick flashing Program check failure.
One flash and pause Compensation fail.
Three flashes and
Compensation successful.
pause
Flashes There is no communication between IGS-PTM and the controller.
Power supply is in the range and communication between IGS-PTM and controller
Lights
properly works.

Wiring
Binary inputs
Binary outputs
Resistance sensor
Note: Range: 0- 2400 Ω
IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-250 Ω. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is

necessary to chose 0-2400 Ω sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.
Voltage sensor
Note: Range 0-100 mV

Current sensor - passive
Note: Range: ± 0-20 mA
IMPORTANT: Physical analog input range is 0-20mA. In sensor configuration in PC tool it is

necessary to chose +- 20mA active sensor HW type to ensure proper function of analog input.
Analog outputs
Note: Range: 0 to 20 mA ± 0,33 mA
Technical data
General data
Current consumption 100 mA at 24V ÷ 500 mA
Protection IP20
Dimensions (WxHxD) 95×96×43 mm (3.7’×3.8’×1.7’)
Analog inputs
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1,5 % ± 1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ± 0,5 ohm out of measured value
Range: 0- 250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ± 2 ohm out of measured value

Analog outputs
Range: 0 to 20 mA ± 0,33 mA
Current
Resolution 10 bit
Binary inputs
Input resistance 4700 Ω
Input range 0 to 36 V DC
Switching voltage level for open contact
0 to 2 V DC
indication
Max voltage level for close contact indication 8 to 36 V DC
Binary outputs
Max current 500 mA
Max switching voltage 36 V DC
Range 0-100 mV
Voltage
Accuracy: 1,5 % ± 1 mV out of measured value
Range: 0-20 mA
Current
Accuracy: 2.5 % ± 0,5 ohm out of measured value
Range: 0- 250 Ω
Resistive
Accuracy: 1 % ± 2 ohm out of measured value
IGL-RA15
Remote annunciator (IGL-RA15) is designed as an extension signaling unit.
The unit is equipped with a fully configurable tri color (red, orange, green) LED for intuitive operation
together with high functionality.
Image 8.177 IGL-RA15

Image 8.178 IGL-RA15 dimensions
Terminals
Horn Horn
CAN CAN1 line
Power Power supply
CAN address
Address Jumper A Jumper B

1 OPEN OPEN
5+6 CLOSED OPEN
Customer defined CLOSED CLOSED
SW changing of CAN1 address is enabled only when both jumpers are closed. Any one of these addresses (1+2
or 3+4 or 5+6 or 7+8) can be set by following steps:
Switch to programming mode (Hold the Horn reset and Lamp test when unit is powering on). Status led is
yellow
Press Lamp test sixteen times
Set the address up by pressing Horn reset.
The number of red luminous LEDs means the CAN1 addresses (two for addresses 1+2, four for
addresses 3+4, six for addresses 5+6 and eight for addresses 7+8)
Press Lamp test
LED indication
Each LED color is adjusted independently of controller output settings. If controller output 1 is set as “Common
Shutdown” it doesn’t mean red LED1 color for iGL-RA15. The LEDs color can by adjust by following steps:
yellow
Press Horn reset to change the LED1 color (green, yellow, red)

Press Lamp test to switch to the next LED color adjusting
Continue to adjust all LEDs color
After LED15 color adjusting press three times Lamp test
Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns to
normal operation without changes saving.
Status LED
The signals LEDs are handled like binary outputs. It means all what can be configured to binary outputs can be
also configured to the LEDs of IGL-RA15.
Lights Configured logical output is active on the controller
Dark green LED Configured logical output is not active on the controller
Configured logical output is not active on the controller and horn reset was
Dark yellow or red LED
pressed.
Configured logical output is not active on the controller and horn reset was still
Yellow or red LED blinks
not pressed.
Power LED
Blinking green The unit is OK and the communication to the master controller is OK.
Blinking red The unit is OK, but the communication to the master controller is not running.
Blinking yellow EEPROM check not passed OK after power on
Yellow Horn timeout or controller address adjustment
Horn setting
The horn output is activated if any of red or yellow LED is on. Output is on until pressing Horn reset or horn
timeout counts down. The timeout can by set by following steps:
yellow
Press Lamp test fifteen times
Set the horn timeout by pressing Horn reset.
The number of green luminous LEDs means timeout in 10 s (any for disabling horn output, 1 for 10s
timeout, 2 for 10s timeout, 15 for disabling horn timeout).
Press Lamp test two times
Note: If there is no operator action during address setting, color adjusting or timeout setting, the unit returns to
normal operation without changes saving.
The horn is activated if:

Some of red or yellow LED lights up or
At the end of the extended lamp test. See chapter Lamp and horn test (page 575)
The horn can be silenced:

By pressing horn reset button or
It silences automatically after adjusted time
Lamp and horn test

Pressing and holding lamp test button for less than 2 s execute the basic lamp test. All LEDs light up with the
configured colour. If the button is hold longer than 2 s, an extended test is started. Every LED is tested step-by-
step in green colour and then in red colour. The horn is activated at the end of the test. After that the unit returns
to normal operation. The horn can be silenced with horn reset.
Wiring
* terminator resistor only when iGL-RA 15 is the last unit on the CAN1 bus.
Note: The shielding of the CAN bus cable has to be grounded at one point only!
Note: See the section Technical data (page 575) for recommended CAN bus cable type
Technical data
General data
Current consumption 0.35-0.1A (+1Amax horn output) depends on supply voltage
Protection IP65
Humidity 85%
Dimensions (WxHxD) 180x120x55 mm
Weight 950 g

Horn output
Maximum current 1.0 A
Maximum switching voltage 36 V DC
CAN bus interface

Galvanic separated
Maximal CAN bus length 200 m
Speed 250 kBd
Nominal impedance 120 Ω
Cable type twisted pair (shielded)
Following dynamic cable parameters are important especially for maximal 200 meters CAN bus length
Nominal Velocity of Propagation min. 75 % (max. 4,4 ns/m)
Wire crosscut min.0,25 mm2
Maximal attenuation (at 1 MHz) 2 dB/100m
Recommended Industrial Automation & Process Control Cables
3082A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3086A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
BELDEN (www.belden.com) 3087A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
3105A Paired EIA Industrial RS485 cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Trunk Cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Drop Cable
LAPP CABLE (www.lappcable.com)
Unitronic BUS CAN
Unitronic-FD BUS P CAN UL/CSA

InteliMains 210 BTB 2 0 0 Global Guide

Uploaded by

InteliMains 210 BTB 2 0 0 Global Guide

Uploaded by

InteliMains

Copyright © 2018 ComAp a.s.

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 2

4 Installation and wiring 21

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 3

7 Technical data 161

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 4

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 5

6 back to Table of contents

1.1 Clarification of notation

1.2 About this Global Guide

1.3 Legal notice

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 6

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 7

1.4 General warnings

1.4.2 SW and HW versions compatibility

1.4.3 Dangerous voltage

1.4.4 Adjust the setpoints

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 8

1.5 Certifications and standards

EN 60068-2-1 (-20 °C/16 h for std, -40 °C/16 h for LT version)

EN 60068-2-2 (70 °C/16 h)

EN 60068-2-6 (2÷25 Hz / ±1,6 mm; 25÷100 Hz / 4,0 g)

EN 60068-2-27 (a=500 m/s2; T=6 ms)

EN 60068-2-30:2005 25/55°C, RH 95%, 48hours

EN 60529 (front panel IP65, back side IP20)

1.6 Document history

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 9

Fuse switch Relay coil

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 10

6 back to Table of contents

2.1 General description

2.1.1 The key features of InteliMains 210

2.2 True RMS measurement

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 11

2.3.1 Supported configuration and monitoring tools

2.3.2 Configuration parts

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 12

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 13

This tool provides the following functions:

This tool provides the following functions:

WebSupervisor available at: www.websupervisor.net

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 14

This tool provides the following functions:

2.5 Plug-in modules

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 15

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 16

2.6 CAN modules

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 17

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 18

6 back to System overview

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 19

6 back to Table of contents

Image 3.1 BTB application overview

InteliMains 210 controller closes automatically BTB if

6 back to Applications overview

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 20

6 back to Table of contents

4.1 Package content

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 21

Note: Dimensions are in millimeters.

Note: Cutout is in millimeters.

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 22

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 23

⑤ CAN1 ⑦ BINARY OUTPUTS ⑧ POWER SUPPLY, D+ ⑩ USB

InteliMains 210 Global Guide 24

Current inputs 29 - 32 Current measurement wiring (page 28)

Mains voltage inputs 37 - 40 Voltage measurement wiring (page 30)

Bus voltage inputs 41 - 44 Voltage measurement wiring (page 30)

Binary inputs 45 - 52 Binary inputs (page 33)

CAN1 H, COM, L CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 34)

CAN2 H, COM, L CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 34)

Binary outputs 07 - 12 Binary Outputs (page 34)

Power supply "+" D "-" Power supply (page 26)

RS485 A, COM, B CAN bus and RS485 wiring (page 34)

USB USB B USB (page 39)